JP7708533B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that allows gaming.

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player on the basis that the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result.

Conventionally, a player is provided with an advantage based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result.
For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-233666 discloses a game machine that can be controlled to a favorable state.
When the seven symbols are displayed in a row on the display device, a jackpot game can be executed.
A gaming machine that can be controlled in this manner is disclosed.

JP 2014-147575 A

According to the gaming machine described above, during the execution of the jackpot start performance, a right-hit instruction is given to encourage the player to launch the gaming ball to the right by operating the ball launching handle, but there is still room for improvement in the instructions encouraging the player to launch the gaming ball in such a specified direction.

The present invention was devised in consideration of the above-mentioned situation, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can preferably execute instructions that prompt the player to launch a gaming ball in a specified direction.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
An electronic component that is provided so as to be visible to a player;
A specific member provided around the electronic component;
a light-transmitting member that is a light-transmitting member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic components and the specific member through the light-transmitting member;
a launching means capable of launching game media in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means for displaying a guidance message to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second area out of the first area and the second area;
a guide light emitting means for illuminating a guide light to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second area by moving a light emitting portion of the light emitting means;
Equipped with
the light-transmitting member is provided in front of the electronic component and the specific member,
the guidance display includes a first guidance display to be displayed in a first display area and a second guidance display to be displayed in a second display area smaller than the first display area ,
The guidance display means is
displaying the second guidance display in a first period during a predetermined period in which a start performance related to the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed, displaying the first guidance display and the second guidance display in a second period during the predetermined period that is after the first period, and in the subsequent period, ending the first guidance display while displaying the second guidance display;
In a special state after the control of the advantageous state is ended, the second guidance display is performed;
the second guidance display displayed during the first period and the second guidance display displayed in the special state have a common display mode,
the guidance light-emitting means emits light in a manner different from the guidance light-emitting manner during the first period and in a manner linked to the start performance , the light-emitting means is turned off before the second period starts, and when the second period starts, the guidance light-emitting means emits light in a manner linked to the first guidance display.
It is characterized by the following.
Furthermore, the gaming machine of the first means is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001, etc.) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
Electronic components (e.g., LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) that are visible to the player;
A specific member (e.g., base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a light-transmitting member and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic components and the specific member through the member;
a launching means capable of launching game media into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means for displaying a guidance message using an image to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path out of a first flow path and a second flow path along which the game medium can flow in the game area;
Equipped with
The light-transmitting member (e.g., the cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., the decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (e.g., the LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., the base member 301) (see FIGS. 10-12 ),
the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means is
during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the name display of the advantageous state, which is part of a start effect notifying the start of control of the advantageous state, is completed, the second guidance display is performed, and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued;
In a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued;
The second guidance display is continued in a special state after the control of the advantageous state ends.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the electronic components are less noticeable due to the decorative pattern, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. Also, the instruction to prompt the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction can be suitably executed.

In addition, the embodiments for implementing the invention described below include the invention relating to the gaming machine of Means 2 below. Conventionally, some gaming machines, such as those shown in JP Patent Publication No. 2014-147575, have been configured to issue a right-hit instruction that prompts the player to launch the gaming ball to the right by operating the ball launching handle during the execution of the jackpot start performance. However, there is still room for improvement in such instructions that prompt the player to launch the gaming ball in a specific direction, and in light of this, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can suitably execute instructions that prompt the player to launch the gaming ball in a specific direction.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a launching means capable of launching game media into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means for displaying a guidance message using an image to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path out of a first flow-down path and a second flow-down path along which the game medium can flow in the game area;
the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means is
during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the name display of the advantageous state, which is part of a start effect notifying the start of control of the advantageous state, is completed, the second guidance display is performed, and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued;
In a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued;
The second guidance display is continued in a special state after the control of the advantageous state ends.
According to this feature, an instruction to prompt the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction can be preferably executed.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A diagram showing an example configuration of a performance control board related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a storage area related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of determining moving image data and a text display process table relating to feature parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a text display process table relating to feature parts 91AK and 92AK. A figure showing an example of text display control related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. A figure showing an example of the configuration of text display setting information related to feature parts 91AK and 92AK. A figure showing an example of text display related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. A figure showing an example of text display related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. A figure showing an example of text display related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a screen display relating to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing drawing commands for effects related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a screen display relating to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of an effect drawing synthesis process related to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of image processing relating to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing examples of image display relating to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. A diagram showing the reach performance contents and drawing processing patterns related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of determining a drawing process pattern for characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK; A diagram showing the performance execution period for feature parts 01AK and 02AK. A figure showing an example of performance execution related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. A figure showing an example of performance execution related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. A figure showing an example of performance execution related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. A figure showing an example of performance execution related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. A front view showing a pachinko gaming machine as a characteristic part 75SG. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine as a characteristic part 75SG. A front view showing the game board of a pachinko game machine as the characteristic part 75SG. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of Figure 10-3. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. 1A is an enlarged front view showing a main part of the light guide plate device, FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 1A, and FIG. 1C is an enlarged view showing a main part of FIG. (A) is a front view showing the first performance unit, and (B) is a rear view. This is a disassembled oblique view showing the configuration of the first performance unit as viewed from diagonally front. 10-7(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 10-7(A), (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of FIG. 10-7(A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE of FIG. 10-7(A). 1A is a front view showing a base member, FIG. 1B is a front view showing an LED board, and FIG. 1C is a front view showing a cover member. (A) is a front view showing the first performance unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first performance unit with the cover member attached. FIG. 10-11(B) is an enlarged view showing a main part of FIG. (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line F-F of (A). (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first performance unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. A diagram for comparing the first presentation unit and the variable winning ball unit. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining similar colors. (A) is a front view showing the second performance unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second performance unit with the cover member removed. 10-17(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line G-G of FIG. 10-17(A), and FIG. 10-17(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line H-H of FIG. 10-17(A). (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base material and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second performance unit. (A) is a front view showing the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. 10-20, (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 10-20. This is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K-K in Figure 10-20. An explanatory diagram showing the visibility status of the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. A diagram showing the configuration of the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. A diagram showing the presentation mode when the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit emit light. (A) is a schematic front view showing the third performance unit located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing the third performance unit located at the performance position. 1 is a rear perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine relating to a characteristic portion of this embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a frame lamp. An explanatory diagram showing the special pattern LED board and the fourth pattern unit. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a winning type table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern change process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing before a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of processing during opening of a jackpot. A flowchart showing an example of processing after a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. A flowchart showing an example of a performance processing during a jackpot. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a winning fluctuation. This is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. This is a timing chart showing an example of processing after a jackpot has ended. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a lighting state of a lamp. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table; FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage during the fanfare presentation due to a special chart 1 hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored from a power outage during one round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage between rounds after one round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage during the second round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage between two rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage between rounds three rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage during the 4th round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage between rounds four rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored from a power outage during the final round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage during the ending presentation when special chart 1 is hit.

The following describes an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 75SG001),
Electronic components (e.g., LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) that are visible to the player;
A specific member (e.g., base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a light-transmitting member and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic components and the specific member through the member;
The present invention is characterized by the following:
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the specific materials of similar colors make the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing the freedom of design.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
Predetermined electronic components (e.g., the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) that are difficult or impossible to see by a player;
A predetermined component (e.g., a component for fixing the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) provided around the predetermined electronic component;
Equipped with
The predetermined member is characterized in that it has a color that is not similar to that of the predetermined electronic component.
According to this feature, for the specified electronic components that are difficult or impossible to see by the player, general-purpose products can be used without considering the balance with the specified materials, thereby reducing manufacturing costs.

A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect,
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) is provided,
The electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) is characterized in that it is provided at a position farther away from the display means than the specific member (for example, the upper part of the base member 301).
According to this feature, the electronic components are located away from the display means that the player focuses on, making them less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
A protrusion (e.g., protrusion 3A) is provided above the electronic component (e.g., LED board 603, 803) and protrudes toward the player from the electronic component,
The protrusion is larger than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the electronic components are hidden in the shadow of the protruding portion, making them less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect,
The electronic components (e.g., LED boards 603 and 803) and the specific members (e.g., base members 601 and 801) are dark in color (e.g., black) (modified example).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the electronic components can be more easily hidden in the shadow of the protruding parts, making them less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a sixth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects,
The specific member has a higher color brightness or saturation than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the specific member is more visible than the electronic component, so that the electronic component can be made relatively less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a seventh aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth aspects,
The light-transmitting member (e.g., the cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., the decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (e.g., the LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., the base member 301) (see FIGS. 10-12).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing the freedom of design.

The gaming machine of aspect 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 7,
The electronic component (e.g., the LED board 303) is a circuit board,
The specific member (e.g., base member 301) is provided with a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 341) that has at least a part of the same configuration as the circuit pattern (e.g., printed wiring 320) formed on the circuit board (see Figures 10-12).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the circuit pattern formed on the circuit board becomes less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect is the gaming machine according to the seventh or eighth aspect,
The specific member (e.g., the base member 301) has a predetermined area (e.g., rear wall portions 313A to 313D) that can be seen from the player side without passing through the translucent member (e.g., the cover member 302),
The predetermined area is provided with a predetermined decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 341) that is the same or similar in appearance to the decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) of the translucent member (see FIGS. 10-12).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult to tell that the specific member and the translucent member are different members.

A gaming machine according to a tenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth aspects,
A decorative part (e.g., decorative part 420) is provided at a position corresponding to the boundary (e.g., boundary part BD) between the electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) and the specific member (e.g., base member 401) (see FIG. 10-19).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so that they are visible to the player, the decorative part makes it difficult to see the boundary between the electronic components and the specific member, making the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing design freedom.

A gaming machine according to an eleventh aspect is the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect,
The decorative portion includes a plurality of decorative portions,
A plurality of predetermined decorative parts are provided at positions that do not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The plurality of decorative portions is characterized in that the number of the decorative portions is greater than the number of the predetermined decorative portions.
According to this feature, the boundaries between the electronic components and the specific members are made less visible by the multiple decorative portions, making the electronic components less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eleventh aspects,
the light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 402) has a boundary-corresponding region (e.g., convex portion 410) corresponding to a boundary (e.g., boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) and the specific member (e.g., base member 401) and a boundary non-corresponding region (e.g., a region other than convex portion 410) not corresponding to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The boundary-corresponding area has a lower light transmittance than the boundary non-corresponding area.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult for a player to see the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member through the boundary corresponding area, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the eleventh or twelfth aspect,
The decorative portion (e.g., decorative portion 420) displays a logotype (e.g., the letter "V") (see FIG. 10-19).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the player focuses on the logotype and is less conscious of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a fourteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the eleventh to thirteenth aspects,
The electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) includes a light-emitting means (e.g., second performance LED 404A) capable of emitting light from the decorative part (e.g., decorative part 420) (see FIG. 10-18).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the decorative portion stands out due to the light emitted, the player is less likely to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

A gaming machine of aspect 15 is the gaming machine according to aspect 14,
The light emitting means (e.g., the second performance LED 404A) is provided so as to be capable of surface-emitting the decorative part (e.g., the decorative part 420) (e.g., the light from the second performance LED 404A is emitted forward approximately evenly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405 and incident on the area corresponding to the convex part 410, so that the entire front surface of the convex part 410 including the decorative part 420 emits surface light).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the decorative portion stands out due to the surface illumination, making it difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a sixteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifteenth aspects,
A performance means (e.g., a third performance unit 600) having higher visibility than the electronic components and the specific components is provided around the electronic components (e.g., the LED board 803) and the specific components (e.g., the base member 801) (see FIG. 10-20).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the visibility of the presentation means is higher than that of the electronic components, making the electronic components less noticeable, thereby allowing for greater freedom in design.

A gaming machine according to a seventeenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the sixteenth aspect,
The performance means (e.g., the third performance unit 600) is provided closer to the player (front side) than the electronic components (e.g., the LED board 803) (see FIG. 10-22).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to easily increase the visibility of the presentation means.

A gaming machine according to an eighteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the sixteenth or seventeenth aspect,
The performance unit (e.g., the light-emitting performance unit 630) that is provided in the performance means (e.g., the third performance unit 600) so as to be visible to the player is larger than the electronic component (e.g., the LED board 803) (see FIG. 10-20).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to easily increase the visibility of the presentation means.

A gaming machine according to a nineteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the sixteenth to eighteenth aspects,
The presentation means (e.g., the third presentation unit 600) has a presentation section (e.g., the light-emitting presentation section 630) that is arranged to be visible to the player and is characterized by being made of a color that is more visible than the color of the electronic component (e.g., the LED board 803).
This feature makes it possible to easily increase the visibility of the presentation means.

A gaming machine according to a 20th aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the 16th to 19th aspects,
The performance means (e.g., the third performance unit 600) has a light emitting means (e.g., the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B) capable of irradiating light toward the player (see FIG. 10-21 (A)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to easily increase the visibility of the presentation means.

A gaming machine according to a twenty-first aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to twenty aspects,
Further, the game machine includes a specific light-transmitting member (for example, a cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700) that is a light-transmitting member and is provided at a position different from the light-transmitting member,
The transmittance (e.g., XA%, XB%) of the light that has entered the light-transmitting member (e.g., the cover member 302) in a predetermined direction (e.g., the T direction) is lower than the transmittance (e.g., Y%) of the light that has entered the specific light-transmitting member in the predetermined direction (see FIG. 10-14).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the electronic components are less noticeable because the translucency of the translucent member is lower than the translucency of the specific translucent member, thereby increasing the freedom of design.

A gaming machine of aspect 22 is the gaming machine according to aspect 21,
The thickness of the light-transmitting member (e.g., the front-rear dimension L1A, L1B of the cover member 302) is thicker than the thickness of the specific light-transmitting member (e.g., the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A) (see FIGS. 10-14).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light transmittance of the light-transmitting member is reduced, so that the electronic components become less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a twenty-third aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to twenty-second aspects,
The light-transmitting member (e.g., the cover member 302) is colored in a predetermined color,
The predetermined color is characterized by being similar to the color of the electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301).
According to this feature, since the light-transmitting member blends in with the electronic components and the specific member, the electronic components become less noticeable.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the bottom left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a first special pattern display device 4A and a second special pattern display device 4B are provided that perform a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special patterns (also called special patterns) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described below). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the bottom left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning port that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, a start winning port door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, the start winning port door is in a closed position, so that the second start winning port is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning port being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in an on state, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning port (also referred to as the second start winning port being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning port, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that have an electric tulip-type device with a pair of movable wings.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc., as described below), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in Fig. 2. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, a power supply board, etc., are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on or not (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S9). When the presentation control CPU 120 receives the presentation control command, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply being stopped. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, etc. are executed. The data protection process includes the addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, the status of various timers, etc.), as well as the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, a parity bit or a checksum is used to determine whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S8) is performed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (Step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the memory contents of RAM 102 (contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbols were changing, the game control timer interrupt process described below is executed to resume the change of the special symbols from the state before the recovery.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the special symbol game being played may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process processing described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

After executing such game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, by executing a predetermined information output processing, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the big win game state and the small win game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized (described in detail later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 4. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 6 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 7 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 6 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the start winning. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, it also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation of characteristic parts related to setting values)
The following describes the characteristics of the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a board case that is configured to be openable by a first member and a second member, although not shown in the figure. The main board 11 is also provided with a lock switch for switching the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a setting value change state in which the setting value can be changed, a setting change switch that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting values such as the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) described later in the setting value change state, and an opening sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame, although none of these are shown in the figure. Note that the setting value change state in this embodiment is also a state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the staff of the gaming facility or the like (setting value confirmation state).

These operation sections, such as the lock switch and setting changeover switch, which can be operated by game center staff, etc., are provided in the setting changeover main body and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and setting changeover switch are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear of the board case so that they can be operated without opening the board case.

The circuit board case housing the lock switch and the setting changeover switch is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and the setting changeover switch when the gaming machine frame is closed, and they can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame with a specified door key. In addition, since the lock switch requires operation of a setting key held by an attendant of the gaming facility, it can only be operated by an administrator who holds the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF using the setting key. In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but they may be combined into one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is disposed on the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and disposed on the top of the board case. In other words, the display monitor is disposed in front when the main board 11 in the board case is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be viewed when the gaming machine frame is not open, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the front when viewing the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame open, which is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this way, the display monitor is disposed in front when viewing the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame open. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 may be the same as the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The display monitor has a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. Each of the first to fourth display sections of the display monitor is made up of seven segments forming the figure "8," and a dot located at the bottom right of the seven segments. Each of the first to fourth display sections of the display monitor is capable of lighting or flashing in various colors, such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to change these colors in an extremely short cycle to display different colors or what is known as a rainbow.

A game information display unit may be provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at the lower left position of the game area. The game information display unit has a round indicator, right hit lamp, probability change lamp, and time-saving lamp all arranged together. The round indicator can display the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the type of jackpot during a jackpot game. The right hit lamp is lit in a game state in which the game ball is shot toward the right game area, such as a low probability high base state or a jackpot game state as a time-saving state. The probability change lamp is lit when the game is in a probability change state. The time-saving lamp is lit when the game is in a time-saving state. The round indicator is composed of five segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) is changed by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. The setting value consists of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate. In other words, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the most advantageous for the player, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantageous rate becomes. Also, the highest setting value, 6, is the most disadvantageous value for the gaming facility, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous it becomes for the gaming facility. If the payout rate changes depending on the setting value, for example, the probability of a jackpot may change depending on the setting value, or the probability of a jackpot may be constant but the number of rounds in a jackpot game state may change depending on the setting value. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that differ in the degree of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

(Explanation of Characteristic Parts 91AK and 92AK)
Fig. 8-1 shows an example of the configuration of various circuits mounted on the performance control board 12 with respect to the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. In the example of the configuration shown in Fig. 8-1, various circuits such as a performance control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a performance data memory 91AK123, a ROM 91AK124, a RAM 91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the performance control board 12. The performance control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132, an audio processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and an internal memory 91AK136. The VDP 91AK132 includes a command decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The performance control microprocessor 91AK100 may be an integrated processor in which circuits capable of controlling the execution of performances using some or all of a plurality of performance devices, such as the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs, and performance movable members such as movable body 32, are integrated on one chip by performing data processing and signal processing based on the performance control command received from the main board 11. The performance control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132, and an internal memory 91AK136, while some or all of the sound processing circuit 91AK133, the lamp control circuit 91AK134, and the motor control circuit 91AK135 may be provided outside the performance control microprocessor 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the stored data of the performance data memory 91AK123 in response to a request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The performance data memory 91AK123 pre-stores performance data that can be used to execute a performance using the performance device, such as various image data showing a display image on the image display device 5. The image data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, character image data that is sprite image data that is multiple types of image element data corresponding to multiple types of performance images, such as multiple types of decorative patterns variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, may be prepared. The performance image corresponding to the decorative pattern may be included in the character image. In addition, any character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, image data of a performance image showing a person, figure, symbol, etc., and a background image may be stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in advance. As still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to image data, the performance data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the voice data used for voice output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The performance data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the lamp drive data used for lighting the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. The performance data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the motor drive data used for rotating the drive motor that operates the movable member such as the movable body 32. The performance data memory 91AK123 may be a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND type flash memory. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a normal operating state in which the progress of the effects is controlled, the effect data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device.

The ROM 91AK124 stores computer programs and fixed data for performance control. The RAM 91AK125 provides a work area for the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the settings of an internal register, and generates a timeout signal that signals the elapse of time when the measured time exceeds the start time (timeout time) and a timeout occurs. The timeout signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. When the timeout signal is generated, the CPU 91AK131 is reset, and the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 is restarted.

In addition to the program for controlling the performance, the ROM 91AK124 also stores various table data used to control the performance operation. For example, the ROM 91AK124 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables and decision tables prepared for the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, and pattern data constituting various performance control patterns. The performance control patterns are composed of process data including performance control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and end codes associated with the performance control process timer judgment value, for example. A part or all of the performance control patterns and the performance control execution data may be composed as a display list. The display list is data of a group of commands that describes a series of transfer commands to be executed by the VDP 91AK132 in accordance with the order of image processing, etc. The display list may include a mixture of commands for display control, commands for audio control, commands for lamp control, and commands for motor control. By using such a display list to control the progress of the performance, it is possible to control the electrical components used for the performance in a coordinated manner. The RAM 91AK125 stores programs and various data used to control the electrical components used for the performance. The CPU 91AK131 is only required to be able to read out the programs and data stored in the RAM 91AK125 in a read time that is shorter than the read time for the programs and data stored in the ROM 91AK124.

The CPU 91AK131 executes control processing according to a computer program for controlling the performance. At this time, the CPU 91AK131 executes performance control processing for controlling the progress of the performance by the electrical components for performance according to the program read from the ROM 91AK124. The performance control processing may include, for example, a fixed data read processing in which the CPU 91AK131 reads fixed data from the ROM 91AK124, a variable data write processing in which the CPU 91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM 91AK125 and temporarily stores it, a variable data read processing in which the CPU 91AK131 reads various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 91AK125, a receiving processing in which the CPU 91AK131 accepts input of various signals from the outside, a transmitting processing in which the CPU 91AK131 outputs various signals to the outside, or some or all of these processes.

The VDP91AK132 determines the control content of the image display in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the CPU91AK131, the register settings, etc. For example, the VDP91AK132 performs control to execute variable display of decorative patterns and various performance displays by determining the switching timing of the performance images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. The VDP91AK132 may be a microprocessor for image processing, such as a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or more commonly, a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The command decoder 91AK141 decodes the command portion (command code) included in the display control command from the CPU 91AK131 and instructs image processing, etc. according to the decoded result. For example, a group of display control commands included in the decoded result are supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. The command decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoded result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. A group of voice control commands included in the decoded result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. A group of lamp control commands included in the decoded result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. A group of motor control commands included in the decoded result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives video data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 and the like, separates it into video data and audio data, and outputs it. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 expands and decodes the compressed and encoded video data, and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the video renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compressed and encoded character image data and text image data from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like, decompress and decode the data, and then supply the data to the character image renderer 91AK145 and the text image renderer 91AK146.

The video image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The video image renderer 91AK144 may execute image processing capable of adjusting the hue, saturation, brightness, or a part or all of these of the image shown in the video data, and temporarily stores the adjusted video data in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores the data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format to bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may perform image conversion processing and the like to display the character image specified by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 and the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores the data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert the text image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may perform image conversion processing and the like to display the text image specified by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information.

The VRAM 91AK147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP 91AK132. The VRAM 91AK147 may provide areas such as a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer is used to temporarily store palette data in which the display colors of characters and text are defined when the drawing process is performed by the VDP 91AK132, and to temporarily store display data of the performance image created by the drawing process. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting signals that display various images on the screen of the image display device 5. The display drive circuit 91AK148 may output a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and a scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 together with a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to the display data created by the VDP 91AK132.

A frame buffer may be provided inside the VRAM 91AK147 or in a memory module separate from the VRAM 91AK147, such as the built-in memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of the performance image created by the drawing process by the VDP 91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer may be image data (pixel data, raster data) in a bitmap format created by the VDP 91AK132 based on vector format image data (vector data, vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons. The frame buffer may include, for example, an actual display area that stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and a virtual display area that stores display data of various images not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, display data for performing a screen display of the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 may be created in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data of the virtual display area may be supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148 and output to the image display device 5.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are assigned to the memory area of the frame buffer. The image display area stores display data for displaying a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. The image drawing area stores display data for each performance image created by the drawing process. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched to each other each time a V blank occurs. A V blank occurs in a period for updating the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Each time a V blank begins, a V blank interrupt signal may be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V blank occurs, a drawing process for creating display data for each performance image is performed in the memory area assigned as the image drawing area in a certain V blank period (first drawing display period), and in the next V blank period (second drawing display period), this memory area is switched to the image display area. Therefore, the display data created in the drawing process during the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 during the second drawing display period, and the display data created in the drawing process is stored in the memory area assigned to the image drawing area during the second drawing display period.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates an audio signal that enables audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 91AK132. The audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133 is supplied with audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132. The audio decoder 91AK151 expands and decodes the compressed and encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may also include an audio data memory that can store audio data that is not included in the video data in advance. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in, for example, the performance data memory 91AK123 or the ROM 91AK124. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by, for example, expanding and decoding audio data read from the audio data memory based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls the lighting mode (light emission mode) of the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, such as turning on, turning off, and blinking. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on the instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 91AK132, and outputs the data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls the operating state of the drive motor that drives the performance movable members such as the movable body 32 to be operable, such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase). The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on the instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 132, and outputs the data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built into the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used to control the progress of the performance.

Figure 8-2 shows an example of the configuration of the memory area for performance control according to the stored contents. In this embodiment, multiple memory areas are provided, including memory areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14. Each memory area may be provided, for example, in performance data memory 91AK123, ROM 91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or in any or all of these. The multiple memory areas include memory area 91AKM11, which stores data related to moving images, and memory area 91AKM13, which stores data related to text images.

The memory area 91AKM01 stores performance control programs and performance control management data, and functions as a management area for performance control programs, etc. For example, table data, which is data constituting various tables prepared so that the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 can make various judgments, decisions, and settings, and pattern data constituting performance control patterns, may be stored in the memory area 91AKM01 as management data.

The memory area 91AKM02 stores display control programs and display control management data, and functions as an area for managing programs for display control, etc. For example, image processing programs prepared for the VDP 91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various image processing, and display process tables that define procedures for displaying performance images, etc. may be stored in the memory area 91AKM02. The image processing program may include a program that converts image data in vector format into image data in bitmap format. The image processing program may include a program that generates a text image in bitmap format based on text written using character codes and font data.

The memory area 91AKM11 stores video data and video related data including related data. The video data may be a multiplexed encoded stream in which image compression information including reference images and predicted images is generated by a compression encoding process such as motion compensation predictive encoding using multiple frames of original images, and the image compression information is multiplexed with audio data. The video related data stored in the memory area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files constituting a video display process table. The video display process table is used for a display control process that can change the display content and display mode of the video displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 in accordance with the elapsed time. The display content of the video is the content of the video that is reproduced and displayed in response to the video data. The display mode of the video is the mode or form when the video is reproduced and displayed, including the display style and display layout of the video. The table data and data files constituting the video display process table may be stored in the memory area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The memory area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and related data. The character image data may be still image data in which any character image showing multiple types of decorative patterns, people, figures, symbols, etc. is described in vector format or bitmap format. The character image related data stored in the memory area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files constituting a character display process table. The character display process table is used for a display control process that can change the display content and display mode of the character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed in response to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode or form when the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the character image. The table data and data files constituting the character display process table may be stored in the memory area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The memory area 91AKM13 stores text image data and text image related data including related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. The outline font data is data that can be converted into the character shape of each character in the bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates that connect the contour for each character used to display the text image. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or in addition to the outline font data. The vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the character shape of each character in the bitmap format image data by specifying parameters of straight lines and curves for each character used to display the text image. The outline font and vector font are included in scalable fonts whose quality is not easily deteriorated even when the font is enlarged or reduced. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string by combining multiple character images, and may be any text image that indicates a recognizable unit of a word that is set arbitrarily, such as a sentence, a paragraph, a sentence, a phrase, a word, or a combination of some or all of these. The text image data may also indicate a text image made of only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may show telop characters, subtitles, or other information-transmitting characters or decorative characters. The text image data is included in the performance data for displaying the text image, and therefore may be stored in the performance data memory 91AK123. In contrast, font data such as outline font data is used when the VDP 91AK132 executes the image processing program, and therefore may be stored in either the ROM 91AK124 or the built-in memory 91AK136. In this way, the memory area 91AKM13 may be provided in the performance data memory 91AK123, and the ROM 91AK124 or the built-in memory 91AK136. Similarly, the other memory areas may be provided in some or all of multiple memory devices, such as the performance data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AKM124, and the built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image related data stored in memory area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files constituting a text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display content and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed in response to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode or form when the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the text image. The table data and data files constituting the text display process table may be stored in memory area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The memory area 91AKM14 stores audio-related data including audio data and related data. The audio data stored in the memory area 91AKM14 is different from the audio that is played back and output in synchronization with the image in the performance by the moving image display, and may be any audio that can be played back and output as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. The audio-related data stored in the memory area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute an audio output process table. The audio output process table is used for audio control processing that can change the audio, such as sound effects and music, output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. The table data and data files that constitute the audio output process table may be stored in the memory area 91AKM01 as performance control management data.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, the video data read from the memory area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142, which separates the video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 expands and decodes the compressed and encoded video data and supplies it to the video renderer 91AK144. The video renderer 91AK144 converts the video data according to the display mode, including the display style and display layout of the video, and writes and stores the converted data in a specified area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the video is controlled using the video data, which is the stored data in the memory area 91AKM11.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, text image data read from the memory area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compression-encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 before being input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 performs conversion processing of the text image data according to the display mode, including the display style and display layout of the text image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a specified area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data, which is the stored data in the memory area 91AKM13.

Figure 8-3 shows an example of determining moving image data and a text display process table according to the reach performance content. In the reach performance of super reaches such as SP reach A and SP reach B, it is possible to execute a performance by displaying moving images using moving image data and a performance by displaying text images using text image data. The period during which the performance by displaying moving images and the period during which the performance by displaying text images are executed may be partly or entirely the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data is set that is used to control the display when, for example, a text image that combines multiple character images is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-3, depending on the reach performance content, one of the video data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, 91AKD12 is determined, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, 91AKT12 is determined. Of these, the video data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the reach performance content. For example, if the reach performance content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the video data 91AKD01 is determined. If the reach performance content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", the video data 91AKD02 is determined. If the reach performance content is "SP reach A (miss)", the video data 91AKD11 is determined. If the reach performance content is "SP reach B (miss)", the video data 91AKD12 is determined. In contrast, the text display process table may be commonly determined even for different reach performance contents, or may not be determined. For example, when the reach performance contents are "SP reach A (jackpot)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the reach performance contents are "SP reach B (jackpot)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the reach performance contents are "SP reach A (miss)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (miss)," the determination ratio in the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio in the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach performance content is "SP Reach A (jackpot)" or "SP Reach A (miss)" and cannot be determined when the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (jackpot)" or "SP Reach B (miss)". The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (jackpot)" or "SP Reach B (miss)" and cannot be determined when the reach performance content is "SP Reach A (jackpot)" or "SP Reach A (miss)". In this way, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of text images when the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the reach performance of SP Reach B is executed.

When the reach performance content is "SP Reach A (jackpot)", a performance is executed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD01, and when the reach performance content is "SP Reach A (miss)", a performance is executed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD11. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 can be added and displayed to the moving image displayed using video data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using video data 91AKD11. When the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (jackpot)", a performance is executed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD02, and when the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (miss)", a performance is executed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD12. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 can be added to a video displayed using video data 91AKD02 and a video displayed using video data 91AKD12. Therefore, a text image using a common text display process table can be added to a plurality of videos displayed using different video data.

Figure 8-4 shows an example of the configuration of a text display process table. Of these, Figure 8-4 (A1) shows an example of the configuration of a text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in response to the reach performance of SP Reach A, and Figure 8-4 (A2) shows an example of the configuration of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used in response to the reach performance of SP Reach A. Figure 8-4 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in response to the reach performance of SP Reach B.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. The text display process table may include a single text display period in which text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other. The text display period specifies the start time at which the display of the text image to be displayed starts and the end time at which the display ends for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time in the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time from when the display of the moving image in the reach performance starts, or may be specified using the elapsed time from when the variable display starts. However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the moving image, it is desirable to specify the start time and end time in the text display period using the elapsed time from when the display of the moving image starts. The elapsed time from when the variable display starts includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes a reach state, so that the timing at which the display of the moving image starts may differ even in a common reach performance, depending on the variable display performance before the reach state. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image, the timing at which a specific image in the moving image is displayed and the timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be improved. The text image designation information specifies text image data used to display the text image in a specifiable manner. For example, the text image designation information may be information that specifies the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image designation information may be information that specifies the contents of the text image to be displayed using any character code, such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), or JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.). The text display setting information is information that specifies the display mode of the text image in a configurable manner using display style information, display layout information, other metadata, etc. of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be written using a predetermined markup language, such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). Additionally, the text display process table may use any table data so long as it can set text image designation information and text display setting information in association with each other during the text display period.

Figure 8-5 shows an example of display control of a text image using a text display process table. Of these, Figure 8-5 (A1) shows an example of display control in the case of text display process table 91AKT01, and Figure 8-5 (A2) shows an example of display control in the case of text display process table 91AKT02. Figure 8-5 (B) shows an example of display control in the case of text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed, the display of a moving image begins at timing T00, and when the reach performance of SP Reach B is executed, the display of a moving image begins at timing T10.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A1), the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed. Note that both timings T02 to T04 are included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After timing T05 has passed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08, and the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Note that timing T08 occurs later than timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A2), the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. After timing T05 has passed, during the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed.

In this way, the text image specified by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the multiple text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the multiple text display periods may include a period that is partially or entirely common with the second text display period that is different from the first text display period. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05 is set to include the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03 and the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. In this case, the first text display period has a portion common to the second text display period and another portion common to the third text display period. In this way, the first text display period includes a portion common to the second text display period and a portion common to the third text display period. In contrast, the entire second text display period is common to the first text display period, and the entire third text display period is common to the first text display period. In this way, the entire second text display period is included in the first text display period, and the entire third text display period is included in the first text display period. Also, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include periods that are partially common to each other. In this way, the first text display period may include a part of the second text display period, and the second text display period may include a part of the first text display period. Alternatively, the entire first text display period may be included in the second text display period, and the entire second text display period may be included in the first text display period.

By setting the text display process table, different text images specified by the text image designation information can be displayed according to multiple text display periods. This makes it possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image, among the multiple components in the display of the text image, according to the elapsed time during the display period of the text image added to the moving image. For example, by setting the text display process table 91AKT01 or the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. As the second text display period included in this first text display period, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, a text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA03 or text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed during a text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 as a third text display period included in the first text display period. With this setting, during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 of the first text display period, only the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed. On the other hand, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03 of the first text display period, which is common to the second text display period, the display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA02 is added to the display of the first text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 of the first text display period, which is common to the third text display period, the display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA13 is added to the display of the first text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01. In this case, it is possible to change the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed depending on the result of the determination of the text display process table.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, a text image specified by the common text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and a text image specified by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. In contrast, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, a text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, a text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined in correspondence with the common moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD11. Therefore, even when videos using common video data are displayed, the text images to be displayed can be made different in at least some of the multiple text display periods, thereby changing the components in the display of the text images. When videos using common video data are displayed, the text images to be displayed may be made different in all of the multiple text display periods depending on the determination result of the text display process table. When videos using common video data are displayed, the start time, end time, and period length of the multiple text display periods may be made different in part or in whole depending on the determination result of the text display process table. In this way, it may be possible to change part or all of the display period during which a text image added to one video is displayed, and it may be possible to change part or all of the text image added to one video.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), in the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed. Also, in the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed, and in the text display period from timing T13 to timing T14, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA23 is displayed. Note that both timings T12 to T14 are included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After timing T15 has passed, in the text display period from timing T16 to timing T17, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed, and in the text display period from timing T18 to timing T19, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed.

Figure 8-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information is composed of data corresponding to multiple fields, such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field can set the font family, which is the font type, for the font of the characters included in the text image. The fontSize field can set the font size, which is the size at which the text image is displayed. The fontWeight field can set the thickness of the characters included in the text image. The color field can set the display color of the characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field can set the style of the characters in the text image, such as standard, italic, or oblique. The textAlign field can set the alignment of the characters included in the text image, such as right-justified, centered, or left-justified. The textDecoration field can set the decoration display added to the text image, such as underline, overline, strikethrough, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

Figure 8-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of text display setting information 91AKB01. Figure 8-6 (B) shows an example of the configuration of text display setting information 91AKB02. Figure 8-6 (C1) shows an example of the configuration of text display setting information 91AKB03. Figure 8-6 (C2) shows an example of the configuration of text display setting information 91AKB13. Text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but is not included in text display process table 91AKT02. Text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in text display process table 91AKT02, but is not included in text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In the multiple text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image specified by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. This makes it possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the multiple components in the display of the text image in the display period of the text image added to the moving image according to the elapsed time. For example, by setting in the text display process table 91AKT01 or the text display process table 91AKT02, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03 as the second text display period included in this first text display period, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, there is a third text display period included in the first text display period, during which the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by text display setting information 91AKB13. Due to such settings, during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 of the first text display period, only the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by text display setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, during the first text display period, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, the display of the text image is changed so that the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 and is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the first text display period, in the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, the display of the text image is changed so that the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 and is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style and display layout displayed by the text display setting information 91AKB13.

During the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 may be displayed in a display style or layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02, different from the display style or layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. During the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a display style or layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, different from the display style or layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Alternatively, during the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a display style or layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB13, different from the display style or layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this way, during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is a period common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode, and the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA02 can be changed to and displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. During the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is a period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode, and the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA03 may be changed to and displayed in a third display mode different from the first and second display modes. Alternatively, during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01 may be displayed in the first display mode, and the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA13 may be changed to a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes and displayed. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, some text images can be displayed in a different display mode from the other text images. Also, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, the display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed, such that the text image in the second display mode may be changed to a text image in the third display mode and displayed, or the text image in the second display mode may be changed to a text image in the fourth display mode and displayed.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. This allows a common text image to be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 in response to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in response to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02 in response to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 can be displayed in a common display mode. Also, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA22 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02. In this way, even if different text images are added to different moving images, they may be displayed in a common display mode according to the setting data of the common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 in correspondence with the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 in correspondence with the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this way, even if the text images are common, they may be displayed in different display modes according to the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with multiple text display periods. In addition, in multiple text display process tables, at least some of the text image designation information and text display setting information set in association with multiple text display periods can be set as common information, and some or all of the information can be set as different information. These settings allow the first and second components related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, to be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the color field is set so that the display color of the text image changes stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), a text image is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), a text image is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component during the corresponding text display period, the display mode that is the second component related to the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. Note that, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changeable according to the reach performance content, etc., even when the same text image is specified by the text image designation information. In this case, for example, it may be determined whether or not to change the display color of the text image at a different rate depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state, such as whether or not it is a "jackpot", or it may be determined to be one of a plurality of display colors. Also, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changeable according to the execution result of the performance control program by the CPU 91AK131, even when the same text image is specified by the text image designation information. In this case, the VDP 91AK132 may change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on a display control command from the CPU 91AK131, a register setting, or the like. In this way, the display mode, such as the display style of the text image, can be changed simply by changing a part of the data related to the text image included in the text display process table, so that various text images can be displayed while preventing an increase in data capacity and an increase in processing load. When the display color of the text image is changed, other display styles may also be changed accordingly. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image tends to be easy for the player to see, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image tends to be difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the size of the text image set by the fontSize field, for example, may be changed so that the font size is larger than when the display color of the text image is white. As a specific example, a text image displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white may be changed to a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red and displayed. This makes it possible to display text images that are easy for players to see while minimizing any discomfort felt by players when viewing the text images.

Figure 8-7 shows an example of the execution of a presentation in which a text image is displayed using a text display process table. In this example, text images are displayed according to multiple text display periods in conjunction with the video display when the SP Reach A reach presentation is executed. In the SP Reach A reach presentation, when the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot", a video display is performed using video data 91AKD01, and when the display result of the variable display is a "miss", a video display is performed using video data 91AKD11. The video display using video data 91AKD01 and the video display using video data 91AKD11 display a presentation that is a battle presentation in which a common ally character and enemy character battle each other, and it is sufficient that the content of the presentation display is common until the timing when the battle result is announced, for example. Furthermore, if the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot," the determination rate of text display process table 91AKT02 becomes higher, and if the display result of the variable display is a "miss," the determination rate of text display process table 91AKT01 becomes higher. Therefore, in the reach effect of SP Reach A, even during the moving image display period, which is the content of the common effect display, the probability of a jackpot can be made to differ depending on the display content of the text image according to the text display process table.

The performance execution example 91AKD11 shown in Figure 8-7 (A) is a performance content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and corresponding to the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the text image indicating the reach name "SP Reach A" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 has the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01, for example, the origin coordinates are (300,30), the font family is a typeface classified as Gothic, the font size is 48px, the character thickness is a bold line width corresponding to bold, the display color of the text image changes stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF, the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or oblique corresponding to italic, the character arrangement is centered, and the character decoration is unset. In the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP 91AK132 may execute image conversion processing and the like to display the text image in the display mode including the display style and display layout specified by the text display specification information.

In addition, in the performance execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A), the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02 in response to the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. In this case, the components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the text image showing the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 has the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02, for example, the origin coordinates are (250,600), the font family is a typeface classified as Mincho, called BB_mincho, the font size is 36px, the character thickness is the normal line width corresponding to normal, the display color of the text image is #FFFFFF, the background display color is #220C0C, the character style is normal corresponding to normal, the character alignment is left justified, and the character decoration is unset.

The performance execution example 91AKD21 shown in Figure 8-7 (B1) includes performance content different from that of text display process table 91AKT02 when text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by text display setting information 91AKB03 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. In this case, the components of the text image are controlled so that the text image indicating the phrase "Chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 has the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, for example, the origin coordinates are (250,600), the font family is a typeface classified as a Gothic font called CC_gothic, the font size is 60px, the character thickness is a normal line width corresponding to normal, the display color of the text image is #000000, the background display color is #FFFFFF, the character style is a normal typeface corresponding to normal, the character arrangement is centered, and the character decoration is unset. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02, but the font family, font size, character thickness, display color of the text image, background display color, character style, and character arrangement have been changed. In this way, when displaying a text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change some of the data corresponding to the multiple fields included in the text display setting information and display it.

The performance execution example 91AKD22 shown in Figure 8-7 (B2) includes performance content different from that of text display process table 91AKT01 when text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by text display setting information 91AKB13 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. In this case, the text image indicating the phrase "Super hot" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has the following display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13: origin coordinates (250,600), font family DD_mincho, a typeface classified as Mincho, font size 72px, character thickness corresponding to bold, text image display color gold corresponding to "gold", background display color #000000, character style normal corresponding to normal, character arrangement centered, and character decoration gold display effect setting by effect_gold. This text image has only the origin coordinates in common with the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02, and the font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, character style, character arrangement, and character decoration have been changed. In this way, when displaying a text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to individually set data to be changed and data not to be changed among the data corresponding to the multiple fields included in the text display setting information. When comparing this text image with the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01, all settings, including the origin coordinates, have been changed. In this way, when displaying a text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the multiple fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying a text image specified by the text image specification information, when one data among the data corresponding to the multiple fields included in the text display setting information is changed and displayed, it may be possible to change and display other data previously associated with the one data. For example, when changing the display color of a text image to gold corresponding to "gold", it is sufficient to change the character decoration to the effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold and display it.

The display color of the text image and the background display color can be set in 256 steps so that the brightness (gradation) of each of the display colors R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is one of the levels from "0" to "255". In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the color field and the backgroundColor field may have a common data format with the field data constituting the color field and the backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used to display the character image, for example. In addition, the origin coordinate when displaying the text image can be set by a combination of the horizontal x coordinate and the vertical y coordinate on the screen of the image display device 5. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the origin field may have a common data format with the field data constituting the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information may have a common data format with the field data included in the setting information used to display a performance image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. Such text display setting information may be used to change second components related to a text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using information common to a performance image that is different from the text image. This reduces the processing burden of changing second components related to a text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

The font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the fontFamily field may be specific field data that is not included in the character display setting information. Also, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, the character size may be set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the fontSize field may have a specific field format, although it corresponds to the field data constituting the characterSize field in the character display setting information. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information may have a specific data format that is different from the field data included in the setting information used to display a performance image different from a text image, such as the character display setting information. With such text display setting information, the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, may be changed using specific information that is not used in a performance image different from the text image. This makes it possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, to display a variety of text images.

When the display color of the text image is set to, for example, gold corresponding to "gold", the character decoration is set to a gold display effect setting by effect_gold. When "gold" is set in the color field in the text display setting information, effect_gold is set in the textDecoration field, so that a glossy text image is displayed and an effect image for gold display is added around the text image. In the performance execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2), when a specific text image showing the phrase "super hot" is specified by the text image specification information 91A13, a display style for gold display is set by the text display setting information 91AKB13, so that the specific text image showing the phrase "super hot" is displayed with gloss and an effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and increase the interest of the performance by the text image display.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when a performance is executed by displaying a moving image using moving image data, adding a performance by displaying a text image using text image data makes it easier for the player to recognize the content of the performance, and also makes it easier to provide information different from the content of the performance. In this case, in a data configuration in which the text image data is compressed and multiplexed as video data contained in the moving image data, problems such as blurring of the outline and deterioration of display quality may occur in the text image display using the text image data that is decompressed and decoded and reproduced. In addition, when different moving image data are prepared according to the display content of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data capacity of the moving image data is likely to increase, and the processing load of the image data is also likely to increase. When a special compression encoding process or decompression decoding process is executed to prevent deterioration of the display quality in the text image display, the processing load of the image data may further increase.

In feature units 91AK and 92AK, when an effect is executed by displaying moving images using moving image data read from memory area 91AKM11, by adding an effect by displaying text images using text image data read from memory area 91AKM13, it becomes possible to easily execute a variety of text image displays with high quality, making it easier for the player to recognize the content of the effect, etc. In addition, because an effect is added by displaying text images using text image data stored separately from the moving image data, it becomes possible to appropriately control the display to prevent as much as possible an increase in the data capacity of the moving image data and an increase in the processing burden of the image data.

The text image display added to the moving image display using the moving image data is controlled using the text display process table. Similarly, the moving image display is controlled using the moving image display process table, the character image display is controlled using the character display process table, and the audio output is controlled using the audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information specifies the display content of the text image according to the text image data as a first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP 91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK146 can perform image conversion processing and the like to display the text image specified by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. This makes it possible to change the display content of the text image serving as the first component and the display mode of the text image serving as the second component in accordance with the elapsed time during the display period of a text image added to one video. By making the first and second components of a text image added to one video changeable, it becomes possible to easily and highly accurately display a variety of text images, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent increases in data volume and processing load.

If the reach performance content is "SP Reach A (jackpot)", when a performance is performed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD01, a text image using either of the text display process tables 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 can be added and displayed. If the reach performance content is "SP Reach A (miss)", when a performance is performed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD11, a text image using either of the text display process tables 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 can be added and displayed. Also, if the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (jackpot)", when a performance is performed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD02, a text image using either of the text display process tables 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 can be added and displayed. If the reach performance content is "SP reach B (miss)," when a performance is executed by displaying a moving image using moving image data 91AKD12, a text image using either of text display process tables 91AKT11, 91AKT12 can be added and displayed. In this way, a text image using data related to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, can be added and displayed to a plurality of different moving images. By making it possible to add and display text images using common data to a plurality of moving images, a variety of text image displays can be executed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed to prevent increases in data capacity and processing burden.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a text image showing the phrase "Super hot" may be displayed in a changeable display style at multiple times by using text image designation information 91AKA13 and text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The text image showing the phrase "Super hot" may be a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image whose display content suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high probability of being a "jackpot". In this way, when a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group is displayed, a second component such as the display mode related to the specific text image may be changeable at multiple times.

Figure 8-8 shows an example of display control in which the display style of a text image showing the phrase "Super hot" can be changed at multiple times. In this display control example, during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and no character decoration is set during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, the display color is gold and no character decoration is set during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042, and the display color is gold and character decoration is set to an effect display setting for gold display during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. Note that as the display style of the text image common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the font family is set to DD_mincho, a typeface classified as Mincho, by the fontFamily field, and the font size is set to 72px by the fontSize field.

Figure 8-8 (A) shows a case where a text image of the phrase "Super hot" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to black corresponding to #000000 by the color field, and the text decoration is set to no setting corresponding to none by the textDecoration field. As a result, the display mode, including the display style, of the text image showing the phrase "Super hot" is controlled so that the display color is black and the text decoration is set to no setting.

Figure 8-8 (B) shows a case where a text image of the phrase "Super hot" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to gold corresponding to "gold" by the color field, and the text decoration is set to none corresponding to none by the textDecoration field. This controls the display mode, including the display style, so that the text image showing the phrase "Super hot" has a gold display color and no text decoration. If the display color of the text image is set to gold, it is possible to display a glossy text image, for example, by displaying the text image in a gradation. However, if the text image is only displayed with a glossy texture, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the gold display.

Figure 8-8 (C) shows a case where a text image of the phrase "Super hot" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to gold corresponding to "gold" by the color field, and the character decoration is set to an effect display setting for gold display corresponding to effect_gold by the textDecoration field. This controls the display mode, including the display style, so that the text image showing the phrase "Super hot" has a display color of gold and character decoration with an effect display setting for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, if the character decoration of the text image is set to an effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, an effect image can be added around the text image by, for example, the display color of the outline border or shadow in the text image, border display by bevel or emboss, layer style that adds glow, or a combination of some or all of these. This not only gives the text image a glossy appearance, but also adds an effect image around the text image, making it easier for players to recognize the gold display and enhancing the player's impression of the text image display.

In text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, a portion of a text image may be displayed in a different display style from the other portions by using text image designation information 91AKA02 and text display setting information 91AKB02, which are set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. Text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins...". Text display setting information 91AKB02 may be set so that a portion of the text image "character" from the text information showing the line "If this character wins..." has a text image display color, background display color, and character style that are different from the other portions.

Figure 8-9 shows an example of a display in which a portion of a text image has a different display style from the other portions. In this example, a portion of the text image "CHARACTER" is displayed with a white display color, a black background display color, and an italic character style, while the other portions of the text image are displayed with a black display color, a white background display color, and a normal character style. Text display setting information 91AKB02 sets the display color of the text image to white corresponding to #FFFFFF in the color field, the background display color to black corresponding to #000000 in the backgroundColor field, and the character style to italic in the fontStyle field, for the portion of the text image "CHARACTER". Text display setting information 91AKB02 also sets the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000 in the color field, the background display color to white corresponding to #FFFFFF, and the character style to normal in the fontStyle field, for the other portions of the text image. This allows a portion of the text image to be displayed in a different display style from the other portions, enhancing the player's impression of the displayed text image.

In displaying a text image that constitutes a character string combining a plurality of character images, a portion that is displayed in a different display style from the other portions may be changeable according to the progress of the performance by the video image display. For example, when the performance of a piece of music or the audio playback of lines progresses with the display of a video image, a portion of the text image that corresponds to the progress status may be displayed in a different display style from the other portions, such as a specific color display or highlight display. The display style may be changeable so that a portion of the text image is displayed in a fade-in or fade-out display according to the progress of the performance of a piece of music or the audio playback of lines. The portion of the text image that is displayed in a different display style from the other portions may be changeable according to the elapsed time in the execution of any performance, not limited to the situation in which the performance of a piece of music or the audio playback of lines progresses with the display of a video image. In this way, the portion of the text image that is displayed in a different display style from the other portions is changed according to the progress of the performance, thereby enhancing the player's impression of the display of the text image.

This invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all of the technical features shown in the above embodiment, but may have a part of the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

As a specific example, during the display period of a text image added to one video, the display control may execute one of the following two display controls: one that changes the display content of the text image serving as the first component and the display mode of the text image serving as the second component according to elapsed time, and the other that adds a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of videos and enables display. The first and second components related to the text image may be, for example, any components related to the display content and display mode of the text image that can be changed. Instead of a part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to a part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, any components related to the display of the text image may be changeable. For example, any components that can be set related to the display of the text image, such as the time interval or movement width for updating the display position when the text image is moved and displayed, the magnification rate or reduction rate when the text image is enlarged or reduced and displayed, and the time interval or change amount for updating the magnification rate or reduction rate when these magnification rates or reduction rates are changed according to elapsed time, may be changeable.

When displaying a text image corresponding to a common display content, the display mode of the text image is changed not limited to changing the display color of the text image set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6(A), but may be changed to any display mode such as an arbitrary display style or display layout. For example, a text image in a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be changed to any display mode such as origin coordinates, font family, font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these, instead of or in addition to the display color of the text image, during the corresponding text display period. A text image in a display mode set by text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be changed to a display mode different from that of the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01.

The text image data is not limited to being stored in memory area 91AKM13 as data separate from the video data, and at least a portion of the text image data may be included in the video data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as cursive or script writing, may be multiplexed or compression-encoded as part of the video data, and a text image of a specific form may be displayed by decompressing and decoding video data separated from the video data. In this case, data relating to the text image of a specific form is included in the video data and stored in memory area 91AKM11. In this way, data relating to the text image may include specific text image related data included in the video data and stored in memory area 91AKM11, and normal text image related data stored in memory area 91AKM13.

The text display setting information included in the text display process table may be configured with field data corresponding to parts of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields, or may be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 are specified by the text image designation information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 can be read without using font data, and the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not need field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings, such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data related to text display settings, such as textSize.

The scalable font data, such as outline font data and vector font data, stored in the memory area 91AKM13 may be prepared as only data corresponding to text images used in the display performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be prepared as data corresponding to text images not limited to text images used in the display performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as general-purpose Japanese font data. When only font data corresponding to text images used in the display performance is stored in the memory area 91AKM13, an increase in data capacity can be prevented when the number of text images used in the display performance is small. When general-purpose font data corresponding to text images not limited to text images used in the display performance is stored in the memory area 91AKM13, font data can be easily reused, so that the design burden of the performance that displays text images can be reduced, and when a large number of text images are used in the display performance, an increase in data capacity can be prevented.

As the second component related to the text image, the specific text image, whose display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image can be changed at multiple timings, is not limited to the text image showing the phrase "super hot", but may be any text image previously set as a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group. For example, among multiple types of text images, a text image previously prepared for displaying lyrics of a song or a text image previously prepared for displaying subtitles of a moving image may be set as the specific text image. In this way, the second component such as the display mode may be changeable at multiple timings for a specific text image corresponding to an audio performance or display performance in which the performance content changes according to the elapsed time, such as the playback output of a song or the playback display of a moving image. Alternatively, a text image in which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow-colored, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern, may be set as the specific text image. Alternatively, the specific text image may be a text image whose display content suggests that the probability of the display result of the variable display being a "jackpot" is high, and may be a text image whose display content suggests that the probability of the display result being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. The advantageous state is not limited to a jackpot game state, and may include a special game state such as a time-saving state or a probability-changing state. In addition, it may include some or all of the following that provide a more advantageous gaming situation for the player: the upper limit number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot gaming state is a first round number (e.g., "15") that is greater than the second round number (e.g., "7"); the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time-saving state is a first number (e.g., "100") that is greater than the second number (e.g., "50"); the probability of a jackpot in the high probability state is a first probability (e.g., 1/20) that is greater than the second probability (e.g., 1/50); and the number of consecutive wins, which is the number of times that the game is repeatedly controlled to the jackpot gaming state without being controlled to the normal state, is a first consecutive win number (e.g., "10") that is greater than the second consecutive win number (e.g., "5").

A text image having gloss is not limited to a case where a gold color corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, but may include a case where, for example, silver, copper, other metallic colors, or any display color different from a metallic color is set. When a specific text image set in advance is displayed without being limited to the display color of the text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When any text image having gloss is displayed, settings can be made using the textDecoration field in the text display setting information so that an effect image can be added around the text image and displayed.

When displaying a text image in a rainbow, multiple display colors may be changed in sequence within a predetermined range, such as the character coordinates or display time in the display of the text image. For example, when the display color of the text image is set to rainbow colors corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, rainbow display may be possible by transitioning different display colors for each character coordinate of the text image. For example, at character coordinate 1, multiple display colors may be changed in sequence according to the elapsed time, such as changing the display color from red to orange to yellow, then green to light blue, then blue, and then blue-purple to red-purple. At this time, taking into consideration that red is a color that makes a strong impression on the human eye and that the change in blue becomes dark, the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display may be adjusted, and the display color at each character coordinate may be changed in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, light blue, blue-purple, and red-purple. After red-purple, the display color may be changed back to red. This allows the player to smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of a text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, a text image in which multiple display colors are changed sequentially may be displayed within the range of the intra-character coordinates and display time of the text image specified by the text image designation information corresponding to the text display period included in the text display process table. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and increase the interest of the presentation by the text image display. Note that the display of the text image may be displayed in a rainbow pattern as a whole by sequentially changing different display colors according to the intra-character coordinates of the text image. Alternatively, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow pattern according to the elapsed time by sequentially changing a common display color for all intra-character coordinates. In this way, a text image in which multiple display colors are changed sequentially within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time may be displayed.

The first and second components related to the text image may be changeable to different components or to one of a plurality of components at different ratios depending on whether a specific action of the player is detected. The specific action of the player that makes the first and second components related to the text image changeable may be, for example, a push or pull operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A that serves as the V controller, any other action of tilting the operation stick of the stick controller 31A, or an action of pressing the push button 31b. The first and second components related to the text image may be changeable based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, such as the execution state of the process or control in the detection target, or the change in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target, without being limited to being able to detect the player's action. The detection device that can detect the action, change, or difference in the detection target may be any configuration that can detect the state of the detection target mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically, such as an infrared sensor, ultrasonic sensor, CCD sensor, or CMOS sensor. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the results of photographing the detection target using a specified camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of the detection target using a camera, the screen display state of a mobile device may be detected, and the display content and display mode of a text image may be made changeable based on the detection result.

A part or all of the effects by text image display using text image data may be executed as a setting suggestion effect that can suggest a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios according to the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 may be set to 35/100 (=35%) if the setting value is 1, 30/100 (=30%) if the setting value is 2, 25/100 (=25%) if the setting value is 3, 20/100 (=20%) if the setting value is 4, 15/100 (=15%) if the setting value is 5, and 10/100 (=10%) if the setting value is 6. Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 may be set to 65/100 (=65%) if the set value is 1, 70/100 (=70%) if the set value is 2, 75/100 (=75%) if the set value is 3, 80/100 (=80%) if the set value is 4, 85/100 (=85%) if the set value is 5, and 90/100 (=90%) if the set value is 6. According to such a determination ratio setting, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the ratio at which the effect by the text image display according to either the text display process pattern 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is executed is made different according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, an effect is likely to be executed by displaying a text image according to the text display process table 91AKT01, and as the setting value increases, the rate at which an effect is executed by displaying a text image according to the text display process table 91AKT02 increases. Therefore, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)," if an effect is executed by displaying a text image according to the text display process table 91AKT02, the expectation that the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous to the player increases.

In addition, any setting suggestion effect may be executed at different rates depending on the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value is a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the setting value is a setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, a limit is set so that in the range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the setting value is the specific setting value. It is also possible to set a setting suggestion effect that is executed at a predetermined rate when the setting value is a specific setting value and is not executed when the setting value is other than the specific setting value. In this way, in the range where the setting value is a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, a limit is set so that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to execute any setting suggestion effect at different rates depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, during a special period, it may be possible to execute setting suggestion effects at a higher rate than during periods other than the special period. In this case, a limit is set so that in periods other than the special period, the execution rate of setting suggestion effects is lower than in periods other than the special period. It may be possible to set setting suggestion effects that are executed at a specified rate during special periods and are not executed during periods other than the special period. In this way, during periods that are special periods, it is possible to execute setting suggestion effects at a specified rate. On the other hand, during periods that are other than the special period, a limit is set so that setting suggestion effects are not executed.

It is not limited to whether it is a special period or not, and may be possible to execute any setting suggestion effect at different rates depending on whether any special condition is established. For example, when a special condition is established, it may be possible to execute a setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the special condition is not established. In this case, a limit is set as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower in the range where the special condition is not established than in the range where the special condition is established. It is also possible to set a setting suggestion effect that is executable at a predetermined rate when the special condition is established and is not executed when the special condition is not established. In this way, in the range where the special condition is established, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range where the special condition is not established, a limit is set as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established depending on the progress or history of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the result of the game judgment or decision, or it may be any condition that can be established depending on the progress or history of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 or the judgment or decision of the performance. The optional effects are not limited to the setting suggestion effects, and may be executable at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is met, or the performance mode may be determined at different rates depending on whether or not such a condition is met, or the execution timing may be determined at different rates depending on whether or not such a condition is met. In addition, the optional effects may be limited so that a limit is set such that a specific effect is not executed within a range where a preset limiting condition is met, or a limit is set such that the execution rate is lower and the effect is less likely to be executed compared to a range where the limiting condition is not met.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 91AK)
The present invention relates to a gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, capable of executing a game, and includes a performance execution means, such as a performance control microprocessor 91AK100, capable of executing a specific performance that displays a moving image to which a text image is added, such as a reach performance of SP Reach A or SP Reach B, a first memory area, such as a memory area 91AKM11, for storing data related to the moving image, a second memory area, such as a memory area 91AKM13, for storing data related to the text image, and a moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of the moving image using the stored data in the first memory area. The video display device includes a video control means, and a character image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146, for controlling display of a character image using the stored data in the second storage area, the stored data in the second storage area including data on a plurality of character image components including a first component such as a text image designated by text image designation information and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information, and the character image control means is capable of changing the first component and the second component during a display period of a character image added to one moving image, for example, as shown in Fig. 8-7. This allows a variety of character image displays to be easily and with high quality, and enables appropriate display control to prevent increases in data capacity and processing load.

The character image control means may be capable of changing the second component related to the character image when displaying a character image corresponding to a common first component during a display period, for example as shown in FIG. 8-8. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means may be capable of changing the second component related to the character image, for example as shown in FIG. 8-6, by using information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data constituting a color field. This enables appropriate display control to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "super hot," and may be able to change the second component related to the specific character image at multiple times, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8. This allows for appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be implemented.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first and second components of the character image, for example as shown in FIG. 8-4. This allows for appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be implemented.

The stored data in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. This allows a variety of character images to be displayed easily and with high quality, while enabling appropriate display control to prevent increases in data volume and processing burden.

When a specific element, such as the color field being "gold," is set as a text image component, it may be possible to display a glossy text image, as shown in FIG. 8-8, with an effect image added around the text image. This allows for appropriate display control to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and increase the interest of the presentation produced by the text image display.

When a special element, such as when the color field is set to "rainbow," is set as a character image component, it may be possible to display a character image in which multiple display colors are changed sequentially, for example, from red, orange, yellow, green, light blue, blue-purple, to red-purple, within a predetermined range, such as the range of intra-character coordinates or display time. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and increase the interest of the presentation produced by the character image display.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 92AK)
A gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, capable of executing a game, comprising: a performance execution means, such as a performance control microprocessor 91AK100, capable of executing a specific performance that displays a moving image to which a text image is added, such as a reach performance of SP Reach A or SP Reach B; a first memory area, such as a memory area 91AKM11, for storing data relating to the moving image; a second memory area, such as a memory area 91AKM13, for storing data relating to the text image; a video control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a video renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of the moving image using the stored data of the first memory area; and a video decoder 91AK143 for controlling the display of the text image using the stored data of the second memory area. and a character image control means such as a text image renderer 91AK146, the storage data in the second storage area includes data on a plurality of character image components including a first component such as a text image designated by text image designation information and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information, and the character image control means can add character images using data on common character images, such as text images according to text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, to a first moving image such as a moving image using moving image data 91AKD01 and a second moving image different from the first moving image such as a moving image using moving image data 91AKD11, for example. This allows a variety of character image displays to be easily and with high quality, and enables appropriate display control to prevent increases in data capacity and processing load.

The character image control means may be capable of changing the second component of the character image when displaying a character image corresponding to a common first component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, for example as shown in FIG. 8-8. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means may be capable of changing the second component related to the character image, for example as shown in FIG. 8-6, by using information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data constituting a color field. This enables appropriate display control to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "super hot," and may be able to change the second component related to the specific character image at multiple times, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8. This allows for appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be implemented.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first and second components of the character image, for example as shown in FIG. 8-4. This allows for appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be implemented.

The stored data in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. This allows a variety of character images to be displayed easily and with high quality, while enabling appropriate display control to prevent increases in data volume and processing burden.

When a specific element, such as the color field being "gold," is set as a text image component, it may be possible to display a glossy text image, as shown in FIG. 8-8, with an effect image added around the text image. This allows for appropriate display control to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and increase the interest of the presentation produced by the text image display.

When a special element, such as when the color field is set to "rainbow," is set as a character image component, it may be possible to display a character image in which multiple display colors are changed sequentially, for example, from red, orange, yellow, green, light blue, blue-purple, to red-purple, within a predetermined range, such as the range of intra-character coordinates or display time. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and increase the interest of the presentation produced by the character image display.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
The configurations related to the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations related to the characteristic part 60AK, etc. For example, an operation presentation to be executed after a predetermined period of time may be executed as a setting suggestion presentation that is an operation presentation of a suggestion presentation mode, and the first component and the second component may be changeable during a display period of a character image added to one moving image, or a character image using data related to a common character image may be added to the first moving image and a second moving image different from the first moving image and displayed.

(Explanation regarding characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK)
9-1 shows a configuration example 01AKP0 of the screen display in the image display device 5 with respect to the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. In the configuration example 01AKP0, an active display area 01AKA1, a first reserved display area 01AKB1, a second reserved display area 01AKB2, and a small symbol display area 01AKC1 are provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the active display area 01AKA1, an active display is performed by displaying a performance image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first pending display area 01AKB1, a pending display is performed by displaying a performance image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, according to the first pending memory number. In the second pending display area 01AKB2, a pending display is performed by displaying a performance image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, according to the second pending memory number. In this way, in the active display area 01AKA1, the first pending display area 01AKB1, and the second pending display area 01AKB2, active display and pending display that become specific displays based on information related to the variable display are possible. The pending display in the first pending display area 01AKB1 is also called the "first pending display", and the pending display in the second pending display area 01AKB2 is also called the "second pending display".

The first reserved display area 01AKB1 may display reserved items corresponding to reserved numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the right end, and the display area may be configured so that the first reserved display is performed right-justified. The second reserved display area 01AKB2 may display reserved items corresponding to reserved numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end, and the display area may be configured so that the second reserved display is performed left-justified. In the active display area 01AKA1, an active display corresponding to the first reserved display erased (consumed) in the first reserved display area 01AKB1 corresponding to the start of the first special game is started, and an active display corresponding to the second reserved display erased (consumed) in the second reserved display area 01AKB2 corresponding to the start of the second special game is started. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area 01AKA1 may have a common color or pattern with the first hold display and the second hold display, and for example, the active display may have a common effect image with the first hold display and the second hold display that is displayed larger than each hold display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first hold display and the second hold display by executing an active display change effect. In addition, in the active display area 01AKA1, for example, an effect image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display, making it possible to distinguish the active display from the first hold display and the second hold display.

A small pattern display area 01AKC1 is arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5. The small pattern display area 01AKC1 is smaller than the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is provided at a predetermined position such as the right end on the screen of the image display device 5. In the small pattern display area 01AKC1, variable display of small patterns is executed in response to variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns. The performance image showing the small pattern is reduced in size compared to the identification information image which is a performance image showing a decorative pattern, and may be a reduced identification information image capable of variable display in a manner in which it is partially or entirely common to each of the identification information images showing the decorative patterns. For example, when the identification information image showing a decorative pattern includes a portion showing a number and a portion showing a character, the performance image showing the small pattern is an image showing a number corresponding to the pattern number similar to the portion showing the number included in the decorative pattern, and does not include a portion showing a character, so that it may be capable of displaying the small pattern in a simpler manner than the performance image showing the decorative pattern. By displaying small symbols in a simple manner in the small symbol display area 01AKC1, it is possible to prevent the player from misinterpreting the display contents and display results of the small symbols. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of small symbols that serve as reduced identification information is performed, and a confirmed small symbol that serves as the display result is derived. The performance image showing the small symbol may be displayed in a position that is always visible.

Figure 9-2 shows an example of the configuration of a drawing command for effects. In this embodiment, commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG06 are prepared in advance as multiple drawing commands for effects. Command 01AKG01 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling. Command 01AKG02 is a drawing command that commands color blending for inverting color information. Command 01AKG03 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring using a magnification change. Command 01AKG04 is a drawing command that commands color blending for monochrome conversion. Command 01AKG05 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring using rotation. Command 01AKG06 is a drawing command that commands a change in the offset amount of the image position.

The drawing command for effect may be prepared as one drawing command or as a display list. The display list is a group of commands that perform drawing control, and can be created by the CPU 91AK131 as a command string that combines multiple commands for the VDP 91AK132. The VDP 91AK132 can execute drawing processing in the order described in the display list. The drawing command for effect may be composed of a combination of a group of commands that perform multiple types of inter-pixel calculation settings. For example, in a drawing command that commands color blending, parameters corresponding to the effect to be applied may be set to function as a drawing command for each effect. For example, the internal register of the VDP 91AK132 stores control data that specifies the calculation target included in the display list, numerical data that specifies the parameters, and other register values, and drawing according to the display list is started by storing register values corresponding to the execution command.

When performing color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling in response to command 01AKG01, a reduced image is generated, for example, by texture mapping using a bilinear interpolation method for the image data. When generating this reduced image, multiple reduced images with different sampling point groups may be generated. Using the multiple reduced images generated in this way, a composite reduced image is generated by performing a compositing process using color blending, such as alpha blending. The composite reduced image can then be enlarged to render the generated image by changing the color information contained in the image data, so that the image is blurred.

When executing a color blend that inverts color information in response to command 01AKG02, for example, a difference calculation process is performed with the maximum value (e.g., 255) for the RGB values, which are the color information of each pixel (one pixel) shown in the image data. For example, if the R value corresponding to "red" is "80", 255-80=175 is obtained, and the color information can be inverted. By performing a similar difference calculation process on the G value corresponding to "green" and the B value corresponding to "blue", an image can be drawn that has been generated by changing the color information contained in the image data so that the image has inverted color information.

When performing color blending for blurring by changing magnification in response to command 01AKG03, multiple enlarged or reduced images are generated by, for example, scaling the image data. At this time, multiple enlarged or reduced images with different magnifications, such as the image magnification or reduction ratio, are generated. For example, for an image with a display magnification of 100%, two types of enlarged images are generated, such as an image with a display magnification of 102% and an image with a display magnification of 104%. By performing a composition process using color blending, such as alpha blending, using the multiple enlarged or reduced images generated in this way and an image corresponding to the original image data (original image), it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information contained in the image data so that it becomes an image that has been subjected to blurring processing.

When executing color blending to convert to monochrome in response to command 01AKG04, for example, monochrome conversion calculation processing is performed for each pixel on the RGB values, which are the color information of each pixel (one pixel) shown in the image data. In monochrome conversion calculation processing, the color information can be changed so that the image becomes monochrome by substituting the RGB values into the calculation formula for color tone conversion. In this way, by executing monochrome conversion calculation processing, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information contained in the image data so that the image has been converted to monochrome.

When performing color blending for blurring by rotation in response to command 01AKG05, multiple rotated images are generated by performing a rotation calculation process on the image data, for example. At this time, multiple rotated images with different image rotation angles are generated. For example, for an image with a rotation angle of 0°, two types of rotated images are generated, such as an image with a rotation angle of 2° and an image with a rotation angle of 4°. By performing a synthesis process using color blending, such as alpha blending, using the multiple rotated images generated in this way and an image corresponding to the original image data (original image), it is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information contained in the image data so that it becomes an image that has been subjected to blurring processing.

When changing the offset amount of the image position in response to command 01AKG06, the position information of the image is changed, for example, by a coordinate value conversion process on the image data. The coordinate value conversion process changes the position information when drawing an image, such as UV coordinate values, according to the offset amount set as a parameter. The UV coordinate values are given as texture coordinate attribute values when mapping a texture to an object. By executing the coordinate value conversion process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data so that the texture arrangement is different.

In this way, the drawing command for effect may include a command that makes it possible to draw an image generated by changing color information contained in image data, such as commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05. The drawing command for effect may also include a command that makes it possible to draw an image generated by changing position information corresponding to image data, such as command 01AKG06. In addition, the drawing command for effect may include a command that makes it possible to draw an image generated by changing any attribute information related to image data.

Unlike these effect drawing commands, the CPU 91AK131 can also generate normal display drawing commands. Normal display drawing commands perform processing to draw an image corresponding to image data without changing the color information contained in the image data, by not performing synthesis processing such as color blending.

Figure 9-3 shows an example of a screen display configuration including various performance images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The multiple performance images displayed on the image display device 5 are drawn in multiple display layers. The multiple display layers are set with different display priorities in advance as display layers for performance images. In the configuration example shown in Figure 9-3, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are provided as multiple display layers. Of these, layer 01AKL1 is the display layer with the highest display priority, and draws performance images showing small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1 in a displayable manner. Layer 01AKL2 is the display layer with the second highest display priority after layer 01AKL1, and draws performance images corresponding to the pending display and active display in a displayable manner. Layer 01AKL2 may also draw a performance image showing a pedestal below the active display in a displayable manner. Layer 01AKL3 is the display layer with the second highest display priority after layer 01AKL2, and displays and draws effect images used in chance-up effects that increase the chance of a win during a reach. Layer 01AKL4 is the display layer with the second highest display priority after layer 01AKL3, and displays and draws effect images showing decorative patterns in the "left," "middle," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Layer 01AKL5 is the display layer with the lowest display priority, and displays and draws effect images that become background images.

The display layers on which multiple performance images are arranged are specified by, for example, display priority information included in the display list. In the display list, the performance image arranged on layer 01AKL5 may be specified as the first drawing target, and then the performance images arranged on each display layer may be specified as the drawing target in the order of layers 01AKL4, 01AKL3, 01AKL2, and 01AKL1. In addition, for example, a Z value that is a depth value used when drawing each performance image by superimposing it may be set in the image data of the performance image drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5. By setting the Z value using the Z value setting table, the Z value of the performance image drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be different depending on the layer on which it is drawn. For example, a display layer assigned a smaller Z value may be arranged closer to the front (front side) in the Z axis direction than a display layer assigned a larger Z value, so that the display priority of the image is higher.

When writing image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like to a frame buffer provided in the VRAM 91AK147 or the like, the VDP 91AK132 may perform a comparison calculation of the Z value to determine the display priority. At this time, for example, image data of an effect image with a small Z value is written to the frame buffer in preference to image data of an effect image with a large Z value. As a result, an effect image drawn on a display layer assigned a small Z value has a higher display priority than an effect image drawn on a display layer assigned a large Z value, and can be placed on the near side (front side) as viewed from the player. On the other hand, an effect image drawn on a display layer assigned a large Z value has a lower display priority than an effect image drawn on a display layer assigned a small Z value, and can be placed on the far side (rear side) as viewed from the player. The relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be reversed, and a display layer assigned a larger Z value may be positioned closer to the front in the Z axis direction than a display layer assigned a smaller Z value, so that the image has a higher display priority.

In this way, a rendering process of the performance image according to the display layer is executed, and a display image 01AKD1 containing multiple performance images is generated. The display image 01AKD1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after the images rendered on layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are composited so as to be superimposable as multiple display layers with different display priorities.

Of layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are specific layers. In layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are included in the specific layers, it is possible to draw and display performance images using a drawing process that is different from the performance images drawn in layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are included in the special layers.

Figure 9-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect drawing synthesis process executed by the VDP 91AK132. The effect drawing synthesis process is executed, for example, when a display list including an effect drawing command is transferred based on the result of decoding the instruction code by the instruction decoder 91AK141 of the VDP 91AK132. When the effect drawing synthesis process is started, the image data to be subjected to the effect processing is read (step 01AKS01). For example, the VDP 91AK132 reads the image data to be processed from the performance data memory 91AK123, etc., and temporarily stores it in the work area of the VRAM 91AK147, etc. The data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, reads the image data to be processed from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK147, etc., and transfers it to the work area of the VRAM 91AK147, etc., for storage. The image data to be subjected to effect processing is specified by the drawing command as image data indicating an image to be drawn on one of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which is a specific layer among the multiple display layers.

Then, effect color blending is performed according to the drawing command (step 01AKS02). For example, the VDP 91AK132 may perform color blending according to any of commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05, for example, by performing pixel-to-pixel calculation processing specified by the drawing command using some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146. In the case of command 01AKG06, a coordinate value conversion process may be performed to change the offset amount of the image position in texture mapping.

After step 01AKS02, the images are composited and drawn corresponding to the low-priority display layer (step 01AKS03). At this time, the image on which the effect color blend was performed in step 01AKS02 is drawn in the frame buffer for screen display of the VRAM 91AK147. For example, the VDP 91AK132 may use some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146 to perform pixel-to-pixel calculation processing specified by the drawing command, and store the images drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 in the frame buffer for screen display while compositing them according to the display priority. In this way, an image drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which is a specific layer, can be drawn for screen display after changing the color information of the image data by performing the effect color blend.

After step 01AKS03, the images are composited and drawn in accordance with the high-priority display layer (step 01AKS04). For example, the VDP 91AK132 reads image data to be drawn from the performance data memory 91AK123, etc., and draws it in the frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. In this frame buffer, an image in a low-priority display layer has already been drawn in step 01AKS03. The data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, reads the image data to be drawn from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK147, etc., and transfers it to the frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147 for storage. At this time, the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146, in part or in whole, execute inter-pixel calculation processing specified by the drawing command, and the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being composited according to the display priority. The image data to be drawn in step 01AKS04 is specified by the drawing command as image data indicating an image to be drawn on one of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which will be a special layer, among the multiple display layers. As a result, the image drawn on one of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which will be a special layer, can be drawn for screen display without executing effect color blending and without changing the color information of the image data.

In this way, the VDP 91AK132 can execute drawing processes to display various images on the screen of the image display device 5, using image data stored in a specified area of the performance data memory 91AK123 or the VRAM 91AK147. Also, by executing an effect drawing synthesis process, on the one hand, it is possible to change the color information contained in the image data and draw an image drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, and on the other hand, it is possible to draw an image drawn on any of layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, in accordance with the image data.

When a display list including normal display drawing commands but not effect drawing commands is transferred, the VDP 91AK132 can execute normal drawing compositing processing, which is different from the effect drawing compositing processing. In the normal drawing compositing processing, the data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command to read the image data to be drawn from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK147, and transfers and stores the image data to the frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. At this time, the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 execute pixel-to-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, or some or all of them, to store the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 in the frame buffer for screen display while compositing them according to the display priority. In this case, images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can be drawn for screen display without performing effect color blending and without changing the color information of the image data.

Figure 9-5 shows an example of image processing using the effect drawing compositing process. In this case, in a display list including drawing commands for effects, of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in a specific layer, image data 01AKD03 of a performance image to be placed on layer 01AKL3, image data 01AKD04 of a performance image to be placed on layer 01AKL4, and image data 01AKD05 of a performance image to be placed on layer 01AKL5 are specified as the image data to be subjected to effect processing. When the VDP 91AK132 reads out these image data in step 91AKS01 of the effect drawing compositing process, it stores and temporarily stores them in a sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 provided in a work area or the like of the VRAM 91AK147. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A1), image data 01AKD03 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL3, image data 01AKD04 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL4, and image data 01AKD05 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL5 are stored in sub-frame buffer 01AKF01.

Then, the VDP 91AK132 performs color blending for effects on the image data stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 in step 91AKS02 of the effect drawing synthesis process. For example, if color blending for monochrome conversion is specified by command 01AKG04 as the effect drawing command, the color information included in the image data is changed by executing monochrome conversion calculation processing. As a result, the color information of the image data 01AKD03 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL3 is changed to become monochrome converted image data 01AKD13 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD04 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL4 is changed to become monochrome converted image data 01AKD14 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD05 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL5 is changed to become monochrome converted image data 01AKD15 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2).

After that, the VDP 91AK132 synthesizes an image corresponding to a low-priority display layer in step 91AKS03 of the effect drawing synthesis process. For example, the image data read from the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 is written and stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in order from the display layer with the lowest display priority. At this time, the image data may be overwritten or hidden surface erased according to the display priority. Of the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2), the image data 01AKD15 of the performance image arranged in the layer 01AKL5 is read first and written and stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. The image data 01AKD14 of the performance image arranged in the layer 01AKL4 is read second and written and synthesized by superimposing it on the image data 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. The image data 01AKD13 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL3 is read out third, and then superimposed and written onto the image data 01AKD14 and 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 for synthesis.

Then, VDP91AKD132 synthesizes the image corresponding to the high-priority display layer in step 91AKS04 of the effect drawing synthesis process. At this time, for example, by a drawing command included in the display list, the image data 01AKD02 of the performance image to be placed on layer 01AKL2 of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer is specified as the image data to be drawn, and the image data 01AKD01 of the performance image to be placed on layer 01AKL1 is specified next. Each time VDP91AK132 reads out these image data, it writes them into the main frame buffer 01AKF02 and stores them. That is, among the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 to be drawn, the image data 01AKD02 of the performance image to be placed on layer 01AKL2 is read out first, and is superimposed and written on the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 for synthesis. The image data 01AKD01 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL1 is read out last, and then superimposed and written onto the image data 01AKD02, 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02, and composited.

In this way, the image data 01AKD03-01AKD05 temporarily stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 is converted to image data 01AKD13-01AKD15 whose color information has been changed by the effect color blend, and the converted image data 01AKD13-01AKD15 is written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in an order according to the display priority. After that, the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in an order according to the display priority without changing the color information by not executing the effect color blend. Therefore, in the specific layers 01AKL3-01AKL5, various images for effects, such as background images, effect images showing decorative patterns, and effect images for chance up during a reach, can be displayed by drawing using a specific drawing process such as the effect color blend. In contrast, the special layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are drawn using normal drawing processing that does not perform color blending for effects, making it possible to display predetermined images related to the progress of the game, such as presentation images showing pending and active displays, and presentation images showing small patterns.

Figure 9-6 shows an example of an image displayed by executing the effect drawing compositing process. When a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred, the VDP91AK132 can execute the effect drawing compositing process to display an image for presentation drawn by modifying the color information, etc., contained in the image data.

Figure 9-6 (A) shows the image display example 01AKM01 in the case of monochrome conversion. When a display list including command 01AKG04 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display images for presentation drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing or the like in the effect color blend. Monochrome conversion calculation processing is processing for drawing with fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data. As a result, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers of image display example 01AKM01, can display images for presentation drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing or the like, which draws with fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data, as a specific drawing processing. Layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of image display example 01AKM01, can display predetermined images related to the progress of the game by drawing with the normal drawing processing without changing the color information contained in the image data.

Figure 9-6 (B) shows the image display example 01AKM02 in the case of color information inversion. When a display list including command 01AKG02 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display an image for presentation drawn by difference calculation processing or the like in the effect color blend. Difference calculation processing is a process for converting and drawing the value of color information contained in the image data so that it is inverted by the difference with the maximum value. As a result, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers of image display example 01AKM02, can display an image for presentation by drawing it by difference calculation processing, which converts and draws the value of color information contained in the image data, as a specific drawing process. Layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of image display example 01AKM02, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing the value of color information contained in the image data by normal drawing processing without converting it.

In addition, when a display list including command 01AKG01 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display an image for presentation drawn by modifying the color information contained in the image data using a synthesis process that performs a blurring color blend using bilinear sampling as a specific drawing process. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without modifying the color information contained in the image data using normal drawing process.

When a display list including command 01AKG03 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display an image for presentation drawn by modifying the color information contained in the image data using a compositing process that performs a color blend for blurring by changing the magnification as a specific drawing process. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without modifying the color information contained in the image data using normal drawing process.

When a display list including command 01AKG05 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display an image for presentation drawn by modifying the color information contained in the image data using a compositing process that performs color blending for blurring due to rotation as a specific drawing process. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without modifying the color information contained in the image data using normal drawing process.

When a display list including command 01AKG06 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display an image for presentation drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data using a coordinate value conversion process that changes the offset amount of the image position as a specific drawing process. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the position information corresponding to the image data using a normal drawing process.

By using these effect drawing commands, it is possible to display on a specific layer an image for presentation that is drawn by changing the color information contained in the image data, or an image for presentation that is drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data. As a result, even if an image for presentation is drawn using common image data, it is possible to draw it by changing the color information or position information by making it possible to execute different image processing according to the effect drawing command, so that it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing while executing a variety of display effects, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Figure 9-7 (A) shows an example of the setting of the jackpot reliability according to the reach performance content. The jackpot reliability for each reach performance is the proportion of cases in which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state among cases in which the respective reach performance is executed. In this setting example, the jackpot reliability is set to differ according to the reach performance that becomes a super reach of multiple types, such as SP reach A1 to A3 or SP reach B. For example, in the variable display pattern determination table, it is sufficient to set the proportion of the variable display result becoming a "jackpot" according to multiple types of reach performance by allocating a determination value that is compared with a random number value for determining the variable display pattern.

SP Reach A1 to A3 are reach effects of the Super Reach with a lower jackpot reliability than SP Reach B, and are also called "weak SP reach." SP Reach B is a reach effect of the Super Reach with a higher jackpot reliability than SP Reach A1 to A3, and is also called "strong SP reach." For example, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A1 is 20%, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A2 is 25%, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A3 is 30%, and the jackpot reliability of SP Reach B is 80%. Therefore, when the reach performance of SP Reach A1 is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" about once in five times. In contrast, when the reach performance of SP Reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" about four times in five times. The reach performance contents may include a performance mode that allows a part of the SP reach A1 to A3 to be recognized as being similar. For example, the SP reach A1 to A3 may have a common moving image played and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may have a common character image displayed as an animation. The reach performance contents may include a performance mode that allows a difference from the SP reach A1 to A3 to be recognized in the case of SP reach B. For example, the SP reach B may have a moving image different from the SP reach A1 to A3 played and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, the SP reach B may have a character image different from the SP reach A1 to A3 displayed as an animation. The reach performance contents may include a performance mode that allows a difference from the other cases to be recognized in any of the SP reach A1 to A3. For example, the SP reach A1 to A3 may have a moving image different from each other played and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, the SP Reach A1 to A3 may be displayed as animations of different character images. Other presentation modes that allow the difference to be recognized may include any display on the screen of the image display device 5, any sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, any illumination using light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 or decorative LEDs, any movement using movable members for presentation, or any combination of some or all of these.

When a reach performance that results in a super reach, such as SP reaches A1 to A3, is executed, this includes a case where a drawing performance is executed by displaying an image drawn in response to a drawing command for effects. As a drawing performance, it may be possible to select and execute any one of a plurality of types of display performances that can display images drawn by different drawing processes in response to drawing commands for effects. As a drawing performance, it may be possible to execute a display performance that does not display an image drawn in response to a drawing command for effects, but can display an image drawn in response to a drawing command different from the drawing command for effects. When a reach performance that results in a super reach is executed, it may include a case where a performance is executed by displaying an image drawn only in response to drawing commands for normal display, without executing a specific drawing performance.

Figure 9-7 (B) shows an example of the setting of drawing performance contents according to the drawing performance pattern. In this setting example, drawing performance patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are prepared in advance as multiple drawing performance patterns. Some or all of the drawing performance contents differ depending on these multiple drawing performance patterns. The drawing performance contents include the presence or absence and type of drawing performance by effect display, and the presence or absence of drawing performance by strobe display. Drawing performances that do not include effect display or strobe display are also called normal drawing performances. Drawing performances by effect display or strobe display are also called specific drawing performances.

The effect display is a performance display that changes and draws the color information contained in the image data when an effect drawing command is generated and transferred. Types of effect displays include a monochrome conversion effect and a color information inversion effect. The monochrome conversion effect uses command 01AKG04 from among the effect drawing commands to draw and display a performance image that has been subjected to monochrome conversion. The color information inversion effect uses command 02 from among the effect drawing commands to draw and display a performance image with inverted color information. In this way, the effect display only needs to be able to display a performance image drawn by changing the color information contained in the image data. Note that the effect display may also be able to display a performance image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data, for example, using command 01AKG06 from among the effect drawing commands.

The strobe display is a performance display that alternates between an image drawn using image data and a single-color image (e.g., black or white) with settings different from the image data every predetermined number of frames. The strobe display may be executed for images drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, when a drawing command different from the effect drawing command is generated and transferred. In contrast, the strobe display may not be executed for images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers. In this way, while the strobe display may be executed within the range of images drawn on specific layers, a limit may be set that the strobe display is not executed within the range of images drawn on special layers. A pause display may be performed together with the strobe display. The pause display is a performance display that gives the impression that the progress of the performance by the display of images has been paused by continuously displaying the same image over a predetermined number of consecutive frames. Note that the pause display may be performed when the strobe display is not executed.

Figure 9-8 shows an example of how a drawing presentation pattern is determined. For example, in the presentation control process in step S76, when the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171, it is sufficient to determine one of a number of drawing presentation patterns in a ratio according to the variable display result and reach presentation content as shown in Figure 9-8. When a variable display pattern corresponding to the reach presentation of a super reach is specified, the CPU91AK131 extracts a random number value for determining the drawing presentation pattern, and determines the drawing presentation pattern based on the random number value by referring to a drawing presentation pattern determination table according to the variable display result and reach presentation content.

In the determination example shown in Figure 9-8, when the variable display result is "Miss", if the reach performance content is any of SP Reach A1 to A3, there is a 60% (=60/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, a 10% (=10/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKA02, a 10% (=10/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB01, a 5% (=5/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB02, a 10% (=10/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB11, and a 5% (=5/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB12. In contrast, when the variable display result is "jackpot", if the reach performance content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, there is a 5% (=5/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, a 10% (=10/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKA02, a 15% (=15/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB01, a 20% (=20/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB02, a 20% (=20/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB11, and a 30% (=30/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB12. Due to this determination ratio, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state differs between drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 and drawing performance patterns other than drawing performance pattern 02AKA01.

The drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is a pattern that does not execute a specific drawing performance, which is a drawing performance by effect display or strobe display. In contrast, the drawing performance patterns 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are patterns that execute a specific drawing performance by one or both of effect display and strobe display. And, when the reach performance content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, if the variable display result is "jackpot", the probability that the drawing performance pattern other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is determined is higher than when the variable display result is "miss". Therefore, when the reach performance content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, if a specific drawing performance, which is a drawing performance by effect display or strobe display, is executed, the probability that the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the game state is controlled to be a jackpot is higher than when the specific drawing performance is not executed. In addition, the determination rate of drawing performance patterns other than drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is set according to the variable display result so that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than that of drawing performance pattern 02AKA01.

When the reach performance content is SP Reach B, only drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 can be determined, and a restriction is set so that no other pattern can be determined. When the reach performance content is SP Reach B, a reach performance of a super reach is executed, which is a "strong SP reach" that has a higher jackpot reliability than the SP reaches A1 to A3. In such a case, if a specific drawing performance is executed by effect display or strobe display, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the reach performance of the super reach, which has a high jackpot reliability, and there is a risk of reducing interest in the game. Therefore, a restriction is set as a limit that a specific drawing performance by effect display or strobe display is not executed within the range where the reach performance content is SP Reach B. This prevents the player's attention from being distracted from the reach performance of the super reach, which has a high jackpot reliability, and appropriately increases interest in the game.

When the reach performance content is any of the SP reaches A1 to A3, it can be determined to be any of the drawing performance patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, 02AKB12 at different rates depending on the variable display result. When the reach performance content is any of the SP reaches A1 to A3, a reach performance of a super reach is executed, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than in the case of SP reach B. In such a case, when a specific drawing performance is executed using an effect display or strobe display, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot", and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state increases. In this way, when the reach effect content is any of the SP reach A1 to A3, the specific drawing effect is executed, which increases the probability of control to a jackpot game state. Therefore, even in the case of a super reach reach effect, which has a low jackpot reliability, the execution of the specific drawing effect can heighten the player's expectations and appropriately increase the player's interest in the game.

Note that even when the reach performance content is SP reach B, it may be possible to determine a pattern other than drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 at a specified rate. However, when the reach performance content is SP reach B, it may be possible to determine a pattern other than drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 at a lower rate than when the reach performance content is SP reach A1 to A3. In this way, a restriction may be set as a limit such that in the range where the reach performance content is SP reach B, specific drawing performances using effect displays or strobe displays can be executed at a lower rate than in the range where the reach performance content is SP reach A1 to A3.

Figure 9-9 (A) shows the performance execution period in the variable display of a super reach. When the variable display of a super reach is executed, the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display can be divided into a plurality of performance execution periods such as performance execution periods D0 to D4. The performance execution period D0 is the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the execution of the reach performance after the reach is established. The performance execution period D1 is the period from the start of the reach performance execution period in which the reach performance that becomes a super reach is executed to the start of the chance up performance execution period in which the chance up performance can be executed. The performance execution period D2 is the period from the start of the chance up performance execution period to the start of the result notification performance execution period in which the result notification performance can be executed after the chance up performance execution period ends. The result notification performance may be any performance that notifies the performance result corresponding to the display result of the variable display in the reach performance that becomes a super reach. The performance execution period D3 is the period from the start to the end of the result notification performance execution period. The performance execution period D4 is the period from the end of the result notification performance execution period to the end of the variable display.

Figure 9-9 (B) shows a performance control example 02AKC01 in each performance execution period. Of the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, in performance execution period D2, which is from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result notification performance execution period, if the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE can be executed. If the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed, so even during performance execution period D2, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed.

Among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D0 from the start of the variable display to the start of the reach performance of the super reach, regardless of whether the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01 or other than 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed. For example, in the performance execution period D0, when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, it is sufficient that a light-emitting performance using the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs can be executed in response to the BGM and sound effect output. Also, in the performance execution period D0, when the decorative pattern is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, or when the decorative pattern constituting the pseudo consecutive chance eye is stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a light-emitting performance using the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs can be executed in response to the BGM and sound effect output. In addition, during the entire performance execution period D0, the normal drawing performance NOR is executed, and it may be possible to execute a light-emitting performance using the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs in response to the background music and sound effect output during the execution of the variable display.

Among the performance execution periods D1 to D4 in which reach performances such as the super reach are executed during execution of the variable display, in the performance execution period D1 following the performance execution period D0, regardless of whether the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01 or other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed. In the performance execution period D2 following such performance execution period D1, the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed when the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01, and the specific drawing performance SPE can be executed when the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01. In the normal drawing performance NOR by the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, an image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. In the specific drawing performance SPE by other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, for example, an image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers. Note that even when a specific drawing effect SPE other than drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed, it is sufficient if images drawn by normal drawing processing can be displayed on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, for example.

In the performance execution period D3 and the performance execution period D4 after the performance execution period D2, regardless of whether the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01 or other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed. In the performance execution period D3, as in the performance execution period D2, the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed when the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01, and the specific drawing performance SPE can be executed when the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01. If the specific drawing performance SPE is executable in the performance execution period D3, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be returned to the execution of the normal drawing performance NOR in the performance execution period D4 for notifying the final decorative pattern that is the variable display result. In addition, the specific drawing performance SPE may be executable in all of the multiple performance execution periods D1 to D4. Prior to the variable display in which the reach performance of the Super Reach is executed, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be started based on the result of the determination at the time of the start winning that the reach performance of the Super Reach is to be executed. Even when the specific drawing performance SPE can be executed in a period other than the performance execution period D2, it is sufficient that, as in the case of executing the specific drawing performance SPE in the performance execution period D2, images drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed on the specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, and images drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers.

When a normal drawing performance NOR is executed during a period other than the performance execution period D0 among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, a light-emitting performance can be executed using light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs. In contrast, when a specific drawing performance SPE is executed during the performance execution period D2, etc., the light-emitting performance is controlled not to be executed. For example, when a specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs can be turned off to prevent the light-emitting performance from being executed. In this way, when a normal drawing performance NOR capable of displaying an image drawn by a normal drawing process is executed, a light-emitting performance using light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 can be executed. On the other hand, when a specific drawing performance SPE capable of displaying an image drawn by a specific drawing process is executed, a light-emitting performance using light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 is not executed. Therefore, within the range of the performance execution period in which the normal drawing performance NOR, which can display an image drawn by the normal drawing process, is executed, a light-emitting performance using the light-emitting members can be executed, while within the range of the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE, which can display an image drawn by the specific drawing process, is executed, a limit is set in which a light-emitting performance using the light-emitting members is not executed. When the specific drawing performance SPE using effect display or strobe display is executed, the light-emitting performance is not executed, and the game interest can be increased by an appropriate image display that allows the player to easily recognize the image drawn by the specific drawing process.

When the specific drawing performance SPE is executed during the performance execution period D2, etc., the restriction is not limited to the restriction of not executing the light-emitting performance by emitting light from the light-emitting members, and the performance mode of the light-emitting performance may be restricted, for example, by reducing the amount of performance of the light-emitting performance compared to when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed. When the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the restriction may be set so as to reduce the amount of performance by lowering the amount of light emission (brightness) of the light-emitting members in the light-emitting performance compared to when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed. Alternatively, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the restriction may be set so as to reduce the amount of performance by reducing the number of light-emitting members that can emit light in the light-emitting performance compared to when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed. Alternatively, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the restriction may be set so as to reduce the amount of performance by reducing the light-emitting color used in the light-emitting performance (for example, monochromatic light emission) compared to when the normal drawing processing NOR is executed.

Figures 9-10 to 9-13 show examples of reach effects and drawing effects. Figure 9-10 shows an example of effect execution when drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is selected among the cases where a reach effect resulting in a super reach is executed. Figure 9-11 shows an example of effect execution in effect execution period D2 when drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is selected. Figure 9-12 shows an example of effect execution in effect execution period D2 when drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is selected. Figure 9-13 shows an example of effect execution in effect execution period D2 when drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is selected.

Figure 9-10 (A) shows a performance execution example 02AKM01 when the variable display of the decorative symbols is in a reach state and a reach is established. At this time, the common decorative symbols corresponding to the number "7" are displayed stopped (temporarily stopped) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, resulting in the establishment of a reach, and a normal reach reach performance is executed. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM01, a normal drawing performance NOR accompanied by a light-emitting performance can be executed as appropriate in response to the performance execution period D0. For example, it is sufficient to be able to execute a light-emitting performance using light-emitting components such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to the background music and sound effect output from the establishment of a reach until it develops into a super reach.

Figure 9-10 (B) shows a performance execution example 02AKM02 in which a normal reach reach performance transitions to a super reach reach performance in response to the start of performance execution period D1. Figures 9-10 (C) and 9-10 (D) show performance execution examples 02AKM03 and 02AKM04 when a super reach reach performance progresses in performance execution period D1. In the case of performance execution examples 02AKM02 to 02AKM04, in response to the performance execution period D1, a normal drawing performance NOR accompanied by a light-emitting performance can be executed regardless of the result of the drawing performance pattern determination, and a specific drawing performance SPE is not executed.

Figure 9-10 (E) shows a performance execution example 02AKM05 when a chance-up performance during reach is executed during performance execution period D2. Figure 9-10 (F) shows a performance execution example 02AKM06 when a reach performance is executed after a chance-up performance during performance execution period D2. In the case of performance execution examples 02AKM05 and 02AKM06, a normal drawing performance NOR accompanied by a light-emitting performance by drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is executed in accordance with the performance execution period D2. At this time, because it is drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, a specific drawing performance SPE by effect display or strobe display is not executed.

Figure 9-10 (G) shows a performance execution example 02AKM07 when a result notification performance is executed during performance execution period D3. At this time, a reach performance in which the performance content varies depending on the variable display result is executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and the confirmed decorative pattern is temporarily displayed as a swaying display or the like in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM07, since it is performance execution period D3, a normal drawing performance NOR accompanied by a light-emitting performance can be executed regardless of the result of the drawing performance pattern determination, and a specific drawing performance SPE is not executed.

Figure 9-10 (H) shows a performance execution example 02AKM08 in which a confirmation notification of the variable display result is executed during performance execution period D4. At this time, as the reach performance of the super reach ends, the confirmed decorative pattern is displayed in a completely stopped state. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM08, since it is performance execution period D4, it is possible to execute a normal drawing performance NOR accompanied by a light-emitting performance, regardless of the result of the determination of the drawing performance pattern, and a specific drawing performance SPE is not executed.

Figure 9-11 (A) shows a performance execution example 02AKM11 when a reach chance up performance is executed in response to the start of performance execution period D2. The performance display at this time may be the same as the performance display in performance execution example 02AKM05. However, a pause display may be started in response to drawing performance pattern 02AKA02. For example, images drawn in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, may be copied to a copy area provided in VRAM 91AK147 and stored so as to be reusable. Also, in response to the execution of a specific drawing performance SPE using a strobe display, control is performed so that a light emitting performance is not executed.

Figure 9-11 (B) shows performance execution example 02AKM12, which is a case where a strobe display is executed following performance execution example 02AKM11. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM12, an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single-color image on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, need only be able to display an image drawn using normal drawing processing.

Figure 9-11 (C) shows performance execution example 02AKM13, which follows performance execution example 02AKM12 and executes a performance display that pauses during a strobe display. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM13, it is sufficient to execute a pause display during a strobe display by repeating the pause display started in performance execution example 02AKM11. For example, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, an image read from the copy area of VRAM 91AK147 can be drawn to repeatedly pause and display an image similar to performance execution example 02AKM11.

Figure 9-11 (D) shows performance execution example 02AKM14, which follows performance execution example 02AKM13 and repeatedly displays an image similar to performance execution example 02AKM12. Figure 9-11 (E) shows performance execution example 02AKM15, which follows performance execution example 02AKM14 and repeatedly displays an image similar to performance execution examples 02AKM11 and 02AKM13. Figure 9-11 (F) shows performance execution example 02AKM16, which follows performance execution example 02AKM15 and repeatedly displays an image similar to performance execution examples 02AKM12 and 02AKM14. Figure 9-11 (G) shows performance execution example 02AKM17, which follows performance execution example 02AKM16 and repeatedly displays an image similar to performance execution examples 02AKM11, 02AKM13 and 02AKM15. FIG. 9-11 (H) shows performance execution example 02AKM18, which, following performance execution example 02AKM17, repeatedly displays images similar to those of performance execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM14, and 02AKM16. In this way, by repeatedly switching between an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data, a pause display can be performed along with a strobe display. After the strobe display of performance execution example 02AKM18 ends, the display returns to normal drawing performance NOR and is controlled to execute a light-emitting performance.

This type of strobe display can be performed without dedicated image data, using an image with settings different from the image data, in response to a drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. As a result, even if the image for the effect is drawn using common image data, by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE with a strobe display in response to a drawing command, it is possible to give the player a different impression from the normal drawing effect NOR, and it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing while executing a variety of display effects, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Figure 9-12 (A) shows a performance execution example 02AKM21 in which a specific drawing performance SPE is executed using a monochrome conversion effect according to drawing performance pattern 02AKB02 when a reach chance up performance is executed in response to the start of performance execution period D2. The performance display at this time differs from the performance display in performance execution example 02AKM05 in that layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, display images drawn using monochrome conversion calculation processing, which is a specific drawing process.

Figure 9-12 (B) shows performance execution example 02AKM22, which is a case where a strobe display is executed following performance execution example 02AKM21. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM22, similar to performance execution example 02AKM12, etc., an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single-color image on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, only need to be able to display an image drawn using normal drawing processing.

Figure 9-12 (C) shows performance execution example 02AKM23, in which a specific drawing performance SPE is executed using a monochrome conversion effect according to drawing performance pattern 02AKB02 during the execution of the reach chance up performance following performance execution example 02AKM22. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM23, it is sufficient to be able to continue the reach chance up performance that was started in performance execution example 02AKM21. Note that a pause display may be executed as a chance up performance during a strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing performance SPE using the monochrome conversion effect, even if a strobe display is executed, the pause display of the chance up performance may not be executed by displaying an image drawn using image data read according to the elapsed time, as in the case of performance execution example 02AKM05.

Figure 9-12 (D) shows performance execution example 02AKM24, which displays the same image as performance execution example 02AKM22 repeatedly, following performance execution example 02AKM23. Figure 9-12 (E) shows performance execution example 02AKM25, which displays a reach performance after a chance-up performance in performance execution period D2, following performance execution example 02AKM24. The performance display at this time differs from the performance display in performance execution example 02AKM06 in that layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, display images drawn using a specific drawing process such as monochrome conversion calculation processing.

Figure 9-12 (F) shows performance execution example 02AKM26, which, following performance execution example 02AKM25, repeatedly displays the same images as performance execution examples 02AKM22 and 02AKM24. Figure 9-12 (G) shows performance execution example 02AKM27, in which a reach performance is executed after performance execution example 02AKM25 in performance execution period D2, following performance execution example 02AKM26. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM27, it is sufficient if the reach performance executed in performance execution example 02AKM25 can be executed continuously. Note that a pause display may be executed as a reach performance during a strobe display, or a pause display may not be executed as a specific drawing performance SPE using a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-12 (H) shows performance execution example 02AKM28, which, following performance execution example 02AKM27, repeatedly displays images similar to performance execution examples 02AKM22, 02AKM24, and 02AKM26. In this way, by repeatedly switching between images drawn by monochrome conversion using image data to reduce the number of colors in the color information through monochrome conversion calculation processing, and single-color images with settings different from the image data, a specific drawing performance SPE can be executed using a monochrome conversion effect along with a strobe display.

The effect display that becomes the monochrome conversion effect can be executed without using dedicated image data, using an image that is drawn with fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data in response to the effect drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, the impression given to the player can be made different from the normal drawing effect NOR by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using the monochrome conversion effect in response to the effect drawing command, so that it is possible to execute a variety of display effects while preventing the data volume of the image data from increasing, thereby improving the interest in the game. In addition, by combining the effect display that becomes the monochrome conversion effect with the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and the impression of the display effect can be enhanced while preventing the data volume of the image data from increasing, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Figure 9-13 (A) shows a performance execution example 02AKM31 in which a specific drawing performance SPE is executed using a color information inversion effect according to drawing performance pattern 02AKB12 when a reach chance up performance is executed in response to the start of performance execution period D2. The performance display at this time differs from the performance display in performance execution example 02AKM05 in that in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, an image is displayed that is drawn by converting the color information values using a differential calculation process or the like, which is a specific drawing process.

Figure 9-13 (B) shows performance execution example 02AKM32, which is a case where a strobe display is executed following performance execution example 02AKM31. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM32, similar to performance execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM22, etc., an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single-color image on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display images drawn using normal drawing processing.

Figure 9-13 (C) shows a performance execution example 02AKM33 in which, following performance execution example 02AKM32, a specific drawing performance SPE is executed using a color information inversion effect according to drawing performance pattern 02AKB12 while the reach chance up performance is being executed. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM33, it is sufficient if the reach chance up performance started in performance execution example 02AKM31 can be executed continuously. Note that a pause display may be executed as a chance up performance during a strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing performance SPE using the color information inversion effect, even if a strobe display is executed, the pause display of the chance up performance may not be executed by displaying an image drawn using image data read according to the elapsed time, as in the case of performance execution example 02AKM05.

Figure 9-13 (D) shows performance execution example 02AKM34, which displays the same image as performance execution example 02AKM32 repeatedly, following performance execution example 02AKM33. Figure 9-13 (E) shows performance execution example 02AKM35, which displays a reach performance after a chance-up performance in performance execution period D2, following performance execution example 02AKM34. The performance display at this time differs from the performance display in performance execution example 02AKM06 in that in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, images are displayed that are drawn by converting the color information values using differential calculation processing, which is a specific drawing process.

Figure 9-13 (F) shows performance execution example 02AKM36, which, following performance execution example 02AKM35, repeatedly displays the same images as performance execution examples 02AKM32 and 02AKM034. Figure 9-13 (G) shows performance execution example 02AKM37, in which a reach performance is executed after performance execution example 02AKM35 in performance execution period D2, following performance execution example 02AKM36. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM37, it is sufficient if the reach performance executed in performance execution example 02AKM35 can be executed continuously. Note that it is also possible to execute a pause display as a reach performance during a strobe display, or to not execute a pause display as a specific drawing performance SPE using a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-13 (H) shows performance execution example 02AKM38, which, following performance execution example 02AKM37, repeatedly displays images similar to performance execution examples 02AKM32, 02AKM34, and 02AKM36. In this way, by repeatedly switching between an image with inverted color information drawn by converting the color information values using a differential calculation process using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data, a specific drawing performance SPE can be executed using a color information inversion effect along with a strobe display.

The effect display that becomes the color information inversion effect can be executed without using dedicated image data, using an image that is drawn by converting the value of the color information contained in the image data in response to the effect drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using the color information inversion effect in response to the effect drawing command, it is possible to give a different impression to the player from the normal drawing effect NOR, so that it is possible to execute a variety of display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing, thereby improving the interest in the game. In addition, by combining the effect display that becomes the color information inversion effect with the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and it is possible to enhance the impression of the display effect and improve the interest in the game while preventing the amount of image data from increasing.

By executing a specific drawing performance SPE using effect displays or strobe displays, it is possible to give the player a strange feeling of display performance not found in normal drawing performance NOR. When the reach performance content is any of SP Reach A1 to A3, a reach performance of a super reach is executed, which is a "weak SP reach" that has a lower reliability of a jackpot than SP Reach B, while a specific drawing performance SPE can be executed that gives the player a strange feeling of display performance not found in normal drawing performance NOR. And when a specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state increases, so it is possible to heighten the player's expectations and appropriately improve interest in the game.

The invention relating to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all of the technical features relating to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK, and may have a part of the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

The strobe display has been described as being performed by repeatedly switching between an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. In such a strobe display, some or all of the single-color image may be replaced with a specific image prepared in advance. For example, when a performance image that serves as a character image is inserted and displayed as a specific image, the content of the drawing performance pattern and the determination rate may be set so that the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot" and the player is more likely to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state than when a single-color image is repeatedly displayed.

In the above description, it has been assumed that the light-emitting performance using the light-emitting member is not executed when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed. Such a light-emitting performance using the light-emitting member may include a light-emitting display performance by illuminating the display part of the light-guiding plate. For example, a light-guiding plate as a transparent light-guiding member having optical transparency is provided on the front side (front side) of a part or all of the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, a light-emitting member such as a light-guiding plate LED may be provided near the light-guiding plate, and light from the light-emitting member may be introduced through the end face of the light-guiding plate and reflected by a reflecting part formed in advance inside the light-guiding plate to execute a light-emitting display performance that displays a predetermined pattern or the like. Then, in the performance execution period in which the normal drawing performance NOR is executed in response to the drawing performance pattern, etc., it is sufficient that the light-emitting display performance can be executed based on the determination result of the light-emitting display performance pattern. In contrast, in the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE is executed in response to the drawing performance pattern, etc., it is sufficient to control so that the light-emitting display performance is not executed.

Furthermore, light emission effects using such light-emitting members may include button light emission effects produced by illuminating a button light-emitting section attached inside the push button 31B. In this case, during a performance execution period in which a normal drawing performance NOR is executed in response to a drawing performance pattern, etc., it is sufficient that a button light emission effect can be executed based on the result of determining the button light emission performance pattern, etc. In contrast, during a performance execution period in which a specific drawing performance SPE is executed in response to a drawing performance pattern, etc., it is sufficient to control so that the button light emission effect is not executed.

When multiple display layers are provided, the setting of whether each display layer is a special layer or a specific layer can be arbitrarily changed based on the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the layer 01AKL2 that draws the performance image corresponding to the reserved display or active display so that it can be displayed may be included in the specific layer rather than the special layer. In a setting in which the layer 01AKL2 is included in the specific layer, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the performance image corresponding to the reserved display or active display may be drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, and color information, etc. may be changed. Then, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed by the monochrome conversion effect, it is sufficient that the performance image corresponding to the reserved display or active display can be changed to a monochrome image with a small number of colors and displayed. While enabling such a monochrome display of the reserved display or active display, when a change performance that changes the display color of the specific display related to the variable display such as the reserved display or active display can be executed, when a change performance is executed during the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be terminated when the display color of the specific display is changed, and the execution of the normal drawing performance NOR may be started or resumed. The display color of the specific display may be different depending on the expectation level controlled in the jackpot game state. In the case where the change performance has a success pattern in which the display color of the specific display is changed and a failure pattern in which the display color of the specific display is not changed, the change performance of the success pattern may be executed during the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE, and when the display color of the specific display changes to a specific color, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be terminated, and the execution of the normal drawing performance NOR may be started or resumed. The execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be started at the timing when the reserved display is displayed, and after the variable display and active display corresponding to the reserved display are performed, the change performance of the success pattern may be executed, and when the display color of the active display changes to a specific color, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be terminated, and the execution of the normal drawing performance NOR may be started or resumed.

The display layer included in the special layer may include a direction display layer that can display and draw a performance image showing the launch direction of the game ball. For example, the direction display layer may be capable of drawing and displaying a performance image that encourages the game ball to be launched toward the left game area or the right game area when a launch promotion performance is executed as an operation promotion performance that is a left-hand hit performance or a right-hand hit performance. In the pachinko game machine 1, a game can be played by launching a game ball as a game medium, and a first path and a second path are provided as paths along which the game ball can flow down. The first path may be a right-hand hit path that becomes the right game area in the game area, and the second path may be a left-hand hit area that becomes the left game area in the game area. Then, when it is a first state in which it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the first path, it may be capable of drawing and displaying a first promotion image that encourages the game medium to be launched toward the first path on the direction display layer. In addition, when it is a second state in which it is advantageous to make the game ball flow down the second path, a second promotion image that encourages the launch of the game medium toward the second path may be drawn and displayed on the direction display layer based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. In this way, by including the direction display layer in the special layer, during the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, it is sufficient that the specific layer can display an image drawn by a specific drawing process, while the direction display layer can display an image drawn by a normal drawing process. Therefore, the performance image that encourages the game ball to be launched toward the left game area or the right game area may be drawn and displayed on the special layer by a normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display the image that encourages the launch of the game medium by a normal drawing process rather than a specific drawing process, it is possible to execute various display performances while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image that encourages the launch of the game medium, thereby improving the interest in the game.

As an operation promotion effect, it may be possible to draw and display an effect image that indicates a changeable amount of effect output, such as some or all of the volume, screen brightness, and light emission amount. The display layers included in the special layer may include an operation display layer that draws and displays such effect images for such operation promotion effects.

The display layer included in the special layer may include a warning display layer that can display warning images that notify the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the warning display layer may be capable of drawing and displaying a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred when it is determined that various errors have occurred based on the detection state of various sensors such as a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, a vibration sensor, a door open sensor, a big prize door sensor, a full tank sensor, and a ball out sensor connected to the main board 11 in the pachinko game machine 1, the state of the payout board, the detection state of the game balls by the start port switch, and the count switch. The warning display layer may be set to the display layer with the highest display priority among the multiple display layers. In this way, by including the warning display layer in the special layer, during the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the specific layer can display an image drawn by a specific drawing process, while the warning display layer can display an image drawn by a normal drawing process. Therefore, the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality may be capable of being drawn and displayed in the special layer by a normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display a warning image notifying the occurrence of an abnormality using normal drawing processing rather than specific drawing processing, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image notifying the occurrence of an abnormality while executing a variety of display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game. When notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, even during the execution of a specific drawing effect SPE in which no light-emitting effect is executed, an abnormality light-emitting notification may be executed by illuminating a light-emitting member. In this way, notifications regarding the occurrence of an abnormality may be executed with a higher priority than other effects.

The display layer included in the special layer may include a suggestion display layer that draws a performance image in a setting suggestion performance. For example, the suggestion display layer may be capable of drawing and displaying a setting suggestion image determined at different rates depending on the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. In the pachinko game machine 1, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and it is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance in which the execution or non-execution and performance mode are determined at different rates depending on the setting value as a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting value. For example, it may be possible to select one of a plurality of setting suggestion images at different rates depending on the setting value, and to draw and display the selected setting suggestion image on the suggestion display layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display an image drawn by a specific drawing process on the specific layer during the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, while it is possible to display an image drawn by a normal drawing process on the suggestion display layer. By being able to display an image suggesting a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by drawing it in the special layer using a normal drawing process rather than a specific drawing process, it is possible to execute a variety of display effects while properly ensuring the visibility of the image suggesting the setting value with different degrees of advantage for the player, thereby improving the interest in the game. Alternatively, the suggestion display layer may be included in the specific layer rather than the special layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the specific layer, it is possible to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process in the special layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas it is sufficient that the suggestion display layer can display an image drawn by the specific drawing process. By being able to display an image suggesting a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by drawing it in the specific layer using a specific drawing process, it is possible to diversify the display of images suggesting setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player, thereby improving the interest in the game.

At least some of the features of the pachinko game machine 1 can be applied not only to the pachinko game machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. As an example of application to this slot machine, when the navigation notification that notifies the player of the stopping order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result can be controlled to an assist time (also called AT), which is a notification period during which the navigation notification can be executed, a performance image that identifiably notifies the stopping order may be displayed on the screen of the image display device as the navigation notification. In this case, the display layer included in the special layer may include a notification display layer that draws the performance image used for the navigation notification in a displayable manner. For example, in the notification display layer, when notifying the order in which the variable display by each of the left, middle, and right reels is stopped, it is sufficient that the notification display layer can draw and display a stop order image that indicates the order of the stop operation by the stop switch in the notification display layer. In this way, by including the notification display layer in the special layer, during the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the specific layer can display an image drawn by the specific drawing process, while the notification display layer can display an image drawn by the normal drawing process. By being able to display an image that indicates the operation mode when stopping the variable display on a slot machine by drawing it on a special layer using normal drawing processing rather than specific drawing processing, it is possible to execute a variety of display effects while ensuring the appropriate visibility of the image that indicates the operation mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 01AK)
This embodiment includes the inventions shown below. That is, in gaming machines capable of playing games such as pachinko gaming machines, for example, as described in JP 2018-171129 A, a technology that enables a performance image to be tilted and deformed and displayed according to instructions from a display list in gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, and a gaming machine technology that draws a processed image in which a plurality of deformed images generated using an inverted image are arranged, as described in JP 2012-29947 A, have also been proposed. In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, the visibility of an important image may be reduced by changing the entire image. Therefore, with the aim of providing a gaming machine that improves the interest in gaming while properly ensuring the visibility of the image,
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 01AK is a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of executing a game, and includes a storage means for storing image data, such as a performance data memory 91AK123 or a VRAM 91AK147, and an image processing means, such as a VDP 91AK132, capable of executing drawing processing using the image data, and the image processing means is capable of executing normal drawing processing, such as drawing processing in response to a normal display drawing command, which draws in response to the image data, and specific drawing processing, such as drawing processing in response to an effect drawing command, which draws by changing at least color information included in the image data. It is possible to display images in a plurality of layers having different priorities, such as layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, and the plurality of layers include specific layers, such as layers AKL03 to AKL05, and special layers having higher priorities than the specific layers, such as layers AKL01 and AKL02, and for example, in steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, it is possible to display images for performance by drawing in a specific drawing process in the specific layers, and for example, in step 01AKS04, it is possible to display predetermined images related to the progress of the game by drawing in a normal drawing process in the special layers. This prevents an increase in data capacity and makes it possible to execute performances by a variety of displays while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the images, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may involve drawing using fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data (e.g., monochrome conversion). This prevents an increase in data volume while making it possible to implement a variety of display effects, increasing interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may involve converting the values of color information contained in the image data and drawing it (e.g., inverting the color information). This prevents an increase in data volume while making it possible to implement a variety of display effects, thereby increasing interest in the game.

For example, as in presentation control example 02AKC01, among a plurality of periods including a first period (e.g., presentation execution period D1) in which a specific drawing process is not executed, such as presentation execution period D1, and a second period (e.g., presentation execution period D2) in which a specific drawing process is executed, such as presentation execution period D2, it is possible to cause the light-emitting means to emit light during the first period, and to prevent the light-emitting means from emitting light during the second period. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image.

Alternatively, among a plurality of periods including a first period (e.g., performance execution period D1) in which a specific drawing process is not executed, such as performance execution period D1, and a second period (e.g., performance execution period D2) in which a specific drawing process is executed, such as performance execution period D2, it is possible to cause the light-emitting means to emit light in a normal mode during the first period, and to limit the light emission of the light-emitting means to a level lower than the normal mode during the second period. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image.

The device is equipped with a setting means (e.g., CPU 103 executing setting value change process S6A) that can be set to one of multiple setting values (e.g., values from 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player, and can execute a setting suggestion effect (e.g., effect execution example 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) that suggests the setting of the setting means by displaying a specific mode, and can execute an image drawn by a specific drawing process as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. This can increase interest in the game while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image.

The game includes a setting means (e.g., a CPU 103 executing a setting value change process S6A) that can be set to one of a number of setting values (e.g., values from 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, a setting value change process S6A, and suggests settings for the setting means by displaying a specific mode, for example, a setting suggestion effect (e.g., an effect by effect execution example 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) can be executed, and an image drawn by a specific drawing process can be displayed as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. This makes it possible to execute effects by a variety of displays while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, it may be possible to execute a specific effect that pauses and displays an image, such as a specific drawing effect using drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 (for example, a specific drawing effect using drawing effect pattern 02AKA02). This makes it possible to execute effects using a variety of displays while preventing an increase in data volume, thereby increasing interest in the game.

For example, as in performance execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, a specific layer may be capable of alternating between images drawn using image data and monochrome images (see, for example, performance execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28). This makes it possible to prevent an increase in data volume while enabling performances with a variety of displays, thereby increasing interest in the game.

For example, variable display of identification information images, such as variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R), and variable display of reduced identification information images in a reduced form than the identification information images, such as variable display of small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1 (for example, variable display of small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1), can be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information images can be drawn and displayed by a specific drawing process, and the reduced identification information images can be drawn and displayed by a normal drawing process. This allows for a variety of display effects to be executed while ensuring the visibility of the images, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 02AK)
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 02AK is a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of executing a game, and is equipped with a storage means for storing image data, such as a performance data memory 91AK123 or a VRAM 91AK147, and an image processing means, such as a VDP 91AK132, capable of executing drawing processing using the image data, and is capable of executing a specific performance, such as a reach performance of a super reach, during variable display, which suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot game state, and the performance patterns of the specific performance include a first pattern, such as a drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, and a second pattern, such as a drawing performance pattern 02AKA02, which have different rates of being controlled to an advantageous state; and during at least a first period, such as a performance execution period D1, during the performance period in which the specific performance is executed, it is possible to display an image drawn by a normal drawing process, such as a drawing process in response to a drawing command during a normal drawing performance, regardless of whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern. During the performance period in which the specific performance is executed, in a second period after the first period, such as performance execution period D2, an image drawn by a normal drawing process can be displayed in the first pattern, and an image drawn by a specific drawing process such as a drawing process according to a drawing command during a specific drawing performance can be displayed in the second pattern. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in data capacity, to make it possible to execute performances with a variety of displays, and to appropriately heighten the player's expectations and improve the enjoyment of the game.

The specific drawing process may involve drawing using fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. This prevents data volume from increasing, while enabling a variety of display effects to be implemented, increasing interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may involve converting the values of color information contained in the image data, for example by inverting the color information. This prevents an increase in data volume while making it possible to implement a variety of display effects, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

For example, as in presentation control example 02AKC01, a light-emitting presentation by a light-emitting means can be executed in response to the display of an image drawn by the normal drawing process in a specific presentation, and a light-emitting presentation may not be executed in response to the display of an image drawn by the specific drawing process in a specific presentation. This can increase interest in the game while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image.

Alternatively, in response to the display of an image drawn by the normal drawing process in a specific effect, the light emitting means may be capable of performing a light emitting effect in a normal manner, and in response to the display of an image drawn by the specific drawing process in a specific effect, the light emitting effect may be restricted more than in the normal manner. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image.

The game is provided with a setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A and can be set to one of a number of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, each of which has a different degree of advantage for the player, and can execute a setting suggestion effect such as the effect shown in the effect execution example 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, which suggests the setting of the setting means by displaying a specific mode, and it is also possible to not display an image drawn by a specific drawing process as an image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. This can increase the interest in the game while ensuring the appropriate visibility of the image.

The game is provided with a setting means, such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A, which can be set to one of a number of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, each of which has a different degree of advantage for the player, and can execute setting suggestion effects such as effects using effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, which suggest settings for the setting means by displaying them in a specific manner, and can display images drawn using a specific drawing process as images displayed by the setting suggestion effects. This makes it possible to execute effects using a variety of displays while ensuring appropriate visibility of the images, thereby increasing interest in the game.

During the second period, it may be possible to execute an effect in which the image is temporarily stopped and displayed when the second pattern is met, such as a specific drawing effect based on drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. This prevents an increase in data volume while enabling effects based on a variety of displays to be executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

During the second period, for example, as in performance execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, when the second pattern is selected, it may be possible to alternate between images drawn using image data and monochrome images. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in data volume while enabling performances using a variety of displays, thereby increasing interest in the game.

For example, it is possible to perform variable display of identification information images, such as variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and variable display of reduced identification information images in a form reduced from the identification information image, such as variable display of small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image may be drawn and displayed using a specific drawing process, and the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed using a normal drawing process. This makes it possible to perform a variety of display effects while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The configuration related to the feature parts 01AK and 02AK may be appropriately combined with some or all of the configurations related to the feature parts 91AK and 92AK, the configuration related to the feature part 60AK, etc. For example, in a configuration in which an operation presentation to be executed after a predetermined period of time can be executed as a setting suggestion presentation, which is an operation presentation in a suggestion presentation mode, in a configuration in which a first component and a second component can be changed during a display period of a character image added to one moving image, or in a configuration in which a character image using data related to a common character image can be added to a first moving image and a second moving image different from the first moving image and displayed, a specific layer may be drawn by a specific drawing process to display an image for presentation, and a special layer having a higher priority than the specific layer may be drawn by a normal drawing process to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game, or in a second period after the first period, an image drawn by a normal drawing process in the case of a first pattern may be displayed, and an image drawn by a specific drawing process in the case of a second pattern having a different ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state from the first pattern may be displayed.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 75SG)
Next, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 of the characteristic part 75SG in this embodiment will be described based on Figs. 10-1 to 10-26. Fig. 10-1 is a front view showing the pachinko game machine as the characteristic part 75SG. Fig. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine as the characteristic part 75SG. Fig. 10-3 is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko game machine as the characteristic part 75SG. Fig. 10-4 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Fig. 10-3. In the following description, the direction in which the player is positioned is the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, and the opposite direction is the rear. In addition, the description will be based on the directions of up, down, left and right as seen from the player positioned in front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. In addition, the same reference numerals will be used to designate parts similar to those in the above embodiment, and detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 10-1 to 10-4, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 is composed of a game board 2 (also called a gauge board 2) that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame 3 (also called a base frame 3) that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area Y from a predetermined ball shooting device. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is provided on the game machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50, and when the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

The game board 2 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and is generally rectangular when viewed from the front. It is made up of a board plate 200 on which obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 211, and external rail decorations 212 are provided on the front surface of the game board, and a spacer member 201 attached integrally to the rear side of the board plate 200. The game board 2 may also be made of a non-translucent material such as plywood, and is generally rectangular when viewed from the front. It is made up of a board plate on which obstacle nails (not shown) and guide rails 211 are provided on the front surface of the game board.

Openings 2c are formed in the board plate 200 and spacer member 201 of the game board 2, and the display area of the image display device 5, which is located away from the rear side of the game board 2, can be viewed from the player's side (front side) through the openings 2c. In addition, the area of the display area of the image display device 5 that overlaps with the board plate 200 can be viewed through the board plate 200.

A center decorative frame 51 is attached to the opening 2c of the board panel 200, and the area surrounded by this center decorative frame 51, the guide rail 211, and the outer rail decoration 212 is the area where the game balls flow down in the game area Y. A light guide plate device 500, which will be described later, is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c surrounded by this center decorative frame 51.

A first presentation unit 300 is provided at the lower position on the back side of the board 200, i.e., below the image display device 5. A second presentation unit 400 is provided to the right of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, i.e., at a position corresponding to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. A third presentation unit 600 is provided at the top of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, i.e., at a position corresponding to the top of the display area of the image display device 5. A fourth presentation unit 800 is provided at the upper left position on the back side of the board 200, i.e., at the upper left position of the image display device 5. In addition, a variable winning ball unit 700 is provided at the lower right position of the board 200, where game balls flowing down the game area Y can win a prize.

The first presentation unit 300 and the fourth presentation unit 800 are provided on the rear side of the board panel 200, and are therefore visible from the player side (the front side of the pachinko game machine 75SG001) through the board panel 200. On the other hand, at least the front faces of the second presentation unit 400 and the third presentation unit 600 are located forward of the game board surface, which is the front face of the board panel 200, and are arranged within the opening 2c, and are therefore visible from the player side through the light guide plate 501 of the light guide plate device 500.

(Light guide plate device 500)
Next, the light guide plate device 500 will be described with reference to Fig. 10-5 and Fig. 10-6. Fig. 10-5 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. Fig. 10-6 shows (A) an enlarged front view showing the main part of the light guide plate device, (B) a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B of (A), and (C) an enlarged view showing the main part of (B). In order to facilitate understanding, the light emitting region 506 is shown as dots (halftone dots), and the non-light emitting region 507 without dots (halftone dots) is shown in white.

As shown in Figures 10-5 and 10-6, the light guide plate device 500 mainly comprises a light guide plate 501 that is arranged to close off the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 except for the right and lower areas, an LED board 503 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 502 are mounted for directing light to the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, and a focusing lens 504 for focusing the light from the light guide plate LEDs 502 toward the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501. The light guide plate device 500 is supported by a base member (not shown) that is fixed to the rear surface of the game board 2 and the center decorative frame 51.

The light guide plate 501 is a plate member made of a transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate, having a predetermined front-to-rear width dimension (plate thickness = approximately 5 mm), and is positioned forward of the third performance unit 600 and close to the glass window 50a, as shown in Figure 10-4.

The light guide plate 501 also has a light emitting region 506 as a first region that forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident inside from the right end face 501a forward and emits it from the front surface, that is, a light emitting region that emits light by light incident inside from the right end face 501a of the light guide plate 501 (see the dotted region in Figures 10-5 and 10-6 (A)), and a non-light emitting region 507 as a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident inside from the right end face 501a forward and emits it from the front surface, that is, a non-light emitting region that does not emit light by light incident inside the light guide plate 501 (see the white region in Figures 10-5 and 10-6 (A)).

The light-emitting area 506 is formed so that a figure with a radial periphery appears at approximately the center of the light guide plate 501, and when light enters the inside of the light guide plate 501, the light-emitting area 506 reflects the light and emits it forward, causing a predetermined image to be illuminated and displayed on the light guide plate 501.

As shown in Figures 10-6 (B) and (C), the light-emitting region 506 is formed on the back side with a fine unevenness (rough surface) so as to guide the incident light from the light guide plate LED 502, which is incident inside from the right end face 501a, and emit it from the front. Specifically, the light-emitting region 506 is formed with an unevenness (rough surface) that forms a roughly semicircular shape with a constant pitch in cross section when viewed from the side in the direction of light travel. In Figure 10-6 (C), the unevenness (rough surface) is shown enlarged to facilitate understanding, but the actual light-emitting region 506 has fine unevenness that is difficult to see with the naked eye.

When light is incident on the light guide plate 501 from the right end surface 501a, a predetermined image (still image) is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by a dot pattern consisting of multiple recesses 510 formed in the light emitting area 506 (see the halftone dot area in FIG. 10-5). In other words, the light emitting area 506 as a first area forming a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface is an area in which a dot pattern consisting of multiple recesses 510 is formed, and the non-light emitting area 507 as a second area that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface is an area in which a dot pattern consisting of multiple recesses 510 is not formed. Additionally, in characteristic portion 75SG, a specific image (figure) is exemplified as the display information that can be displayed by light guide plate 501, but other display information including pictures, letters, symbols, designs, patterns, and other decorations may also be displayed.

When no light is incident on the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, the entire light guide plate 501, including the light emitting area 506, is colorless and transparent, and the image displayed on the rear image display device 5, as well as the second performance unit 400 and the third performance unit 600, can be seen (see-through) from the front of the light guide plate 501. When light is incident on the right end surface 501a, the light emitting area 506 emits light, but the areas other than the light emitting area 506 remain colorless and transparent.

In the characteristic portion 75SG, the light-emitting region 506 is formed in an uneven state having a roughly semicircular shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light-emitting region 506 may be formed by a molding method in which unevenness is formed on the back surface (rear surface) of the light guide plate 501 using a stamper or injection. The reflective portion may also be formed by a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, an adhesive dot method in which an acrylic plate and a reflective plate are attached with a dot-shaped adhesive, a groove processing method, etc.

In characteristic portion 75SG, the shape of each of the projections and recesses of light-emitting region 506 on the back surface (rear surface) of light guide plate 501 is approximately semicircular in cross section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cross-sectional shape of each of the projections and recesses of light-emitting region 506 can be modified in various ways, such as to be approximately triangular, as long as it forms a reflective surface that can reflect light toward the front surface (front surface).

The condenser lens 504 is formed in the shape of a long plate extending in the vertical direction from a light-transmitting material such as acrylic or polycarbonate. On the surface of the condenser lens 504 facing the light guide plate 501, multiple semicircular convex portions 504A that bulge toward the light guide plate 501 side in a front view are formed continuously in the vertical direction. The condenser lens 504 is composed of a single member in which multiple convex portions 504A are integrally formed. Each convex portion 504A is formed corresponding to each of the light guide plate LEDs 502.

Note that the convex portions 504A do not necessarily correspond one-to-one to the light guide plate LEDs 502, and for example, one convex portion 504A may correspond to two or more light guide plate LEDs 502. In addition, the condenser lens 504 is not necessarily configured as a single member having multiple convex portions 504A integrally formed therewith, and multiple condenser lenses formed separately to correspond to the light guide plate LEDs 502 may be used.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(C), the front-to-rear width of the condensing lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is smaller than the front-to-rear width of the condensing lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side. In addition, the front-to-rear width of the condensing lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is approximately the same as the front-to-rear width of the light receiving surface of the light guide plate 501, so that the light emitted from the condensing lens 504 is incident on the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-to-rear direction (without light leakage).

The front surface of the focusing lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually slopes backward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side, and the rear surface of the focusing lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually slopes forward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side. In other words, the focusing lens 504 is formed in a tapered shape in which the plate thickness gradually becomes thinner from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side.

In addition, a small gap is provided between the focusing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501. For example, the size of this gap is such that the focusing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 do not come into contact with each other even if vibrations occur during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. This makes it possible to prevent the focusing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from being scratched by vibrations that occur during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

Next, the light guide state of the light emitted from the light guide plate LEDs 502 will be described. The light emitted from each light guide plate LED 502 is incident on the condenser lens 504. Here, the incident surface of the condenser lens 504 is curved to form a lens surface, so even if the light emitted from the light guide plate LEDs 502 is highly directional, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 is diffused radially in the left and right directions within the condenser lens 504. Then, when the light incident on the condenser lens 504 passes through the inner curved lens surface, it is refracted to the right and emitted.

As a result, even if the light emitted from the light guide plate LEDs 502 has high directivity, the light emitted from the light guide plate LEDs 502 can be diffused radially to some extent by the condenser lens 504, making it possible to expand the light-emitting area in the light guide plate 501. In addition, since the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is guided in the horizontal direction (since the light is prevented from spreading radially), only the parts corresponding to each light guide plate LED 502 can be made to emit light. In addition, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 from the light guide plate LEDs 502 is condensed toward approximately the center position in the front-to-back direction while repeatedly undergoing total reflection in the front-to-back direction, and is finally emitted from the end face of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side (the part with the smallest front-to-back width).

With this configuration, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be collected and guided to the light guide plate 501 without diffusing it in the front-to-back direction. In particular, even if the front-to-back width of the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate LED 502 is greater than the front-to-back width of the light-guiding plate LED 502 side of the collecting lens 504, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be guided to the light guide plate 501 without diffusing it in the front-to-back direction, so that the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be prevented from diffusing to the surroundings.

When light from the focusing lens 504 is guided into the light guide plate 501 and reaches the light emitting area 506, the light is reflected by the light emitting area 506 towards the front side (the player's side). As a result, when viewed from the player's perspective, the light emitting area 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light due to the reflected light, and a figure is displayed on the front side of the light guide plate 501 by the area represented by the dots in Figure 10-5 being surface-emitting.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, when viewed from the player (in the front-to-back direction), the image display device 5 is located at the back and the light guide plate device 500 is located at the front. When viewed from the player, the image display device 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. For example, a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal panel is used as the image display device 5. Note that the image display device 5 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and an EL display device such as an organic EL display device or an inorganic EL display device may also be used.

(First performance unit 300)
Next, the first performance unit 300 will be described based on Fig. 10-7 to Fig. 10-12. Fig. 10-7 (A) is a front view showing the first performance unit, and (B) is a rear view. Fig. 10-8 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the first performance unit as seen from the diagonal front. Fig. 10-9 (A) is a CC cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-7 (A), (B) is a D-D cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-7 (A), and (C) is an E-E cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-7 (A). Fig. 10-10 (A) is a front view showing the base member, (B) is a front view showing the LED board, and (C) is a front view showing the cover member. Fig. 10-11 (A) is a front view showing the first performance unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first performance unit with the cover member attached. Fig. 10-12 is an enlarged view showing the main part of Fig. 10-11 (B).

As shown in Figures 10-7 to 10-9, the first performance unit 300 is mainly composed of a base member 301, a cover member 302 that is arranged to cover the front side of the base member 301 and is attached to the base member 301 with multiple screws N1, and an LED board 303 that is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with multiple screws N2, and is arranged so that it can be seen through the glass window 50a and the panel panel 200 from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

The base member 301 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and has a horizontally elongated shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front, rear and peripheral surfaces) are black. The front surface of the base member 301 has a flat portion 311 that is a flat surface, a recess 312 that is a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front and is formed at the bottom of the flat portion 311, and rear wall portions 313A to 313D that are located slightly rearward of the flat portion 311.

The upper part of the flat portion 311 has a plurality of trapezoidal convex portions 314A-314E formed in the longitudinal direction, which constitute part of the decorative pattern 331 described below, and the rear wall portions 313A-313D can be seen between the convex portions 314A-314E. The rear wall portions 313A-313D are formed so as to slope upward and rearward (see FIG. 10-9 (B)). A predetermined decorative pattern 341 is engraved on the front surface of the rear wall portions 313A-313D.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the recess 312 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, is deep enough to accommodate the LED board 303, and is surrounded by the flat portion 311 when viewed from the front. When the LED board 303 is attached, the front surface of the LED board 303 and the flat portion 311 are substantially flush with each other, and only the first performance LED 304 (described below) is located forward of the flat portion 311. The recess 312 also has a number of elongated heat dissipation holes 315 and an opening 316 for routing a cable (not shown) connected to the LED board 303 to the back side.

As shown in Figures 10-8 to 10-9, the front surface of the LED board 303 is equipped with a plurality of first performance LEDs 304 capable of emitting light forward, as well as a plurality of other electronic components (not shown) and a plurality of printed wiring 320 (see the enlarged view of Figure 10-10 (B)). On the other hand, the rear surface of the LED board 303 is equipped with a board-side connector CN for connecting a cable (not shown) to the LED board 303 and electronic components (not shown). In addition, the surface of the LED board 303 (the insulating parts on the front and rear surfaces excluding the printed wiring 320) is black.

The cover member 302 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a horizontally elongated shape when viewed from the front, and has a first translucent portion 321 that corresponds to part of the flat portion 311 and recessed portion 312 of the base member 301, and second translucent portions 322A, 322B that mainly correspond to the first performance LED 304. In addition, multiple trapezoidal convex portions 324A-324E are formed in the longitudinal direction at positions corresponding to the convex portions 314A-314E of the base member 301.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the second light-transmitting sections 322A and 322B have a front surface that protrudes forward from the front surface of the first light-transmitting section 321, and a recess 322D is formed on the back surface, making it possible to accommodate the first performance LED 304. In addition, a light diffusion section 322C consisting of fine unevenness is formed on the back surface of the second light-transmitting sections 322A and 322B, making it possible to diffuse light from the first performance LED 304 at the rear and emit it forward. The unevenness may be formed, for example, by sandblasting or diamond cutting, and the formation method and shape can be changed in various ways.

As shown in FIG. 10-10(C), the first translucent portion 321 is provided with a plurality of decorative patterns 331 each having a hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. In detail, each decorative pattern 331 has a decorative portion 331A consisting of a plurality of horizontal lines extending in the left-right direction, decorative portions 331B and 331C consisting of inclined lines extending diagonally to the left and right, a decorative portion 331D having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a decorative portion 331E having a triangular shape when viewed from the front. By sharing the decorative portions 331A to 331C with adjacent decorative patterns 331, the plurality of decorative patterns 331 are provided continuously.

In addition, each of these decorative parts 331A-331E is made to look milky white or translucent when viewed by the player by, for example, sandblasting the rear (or front) of the cover member 302 to form fine irregularities, or by attaching a translucent sticker or the like.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), the LED board 303, which is an electronic component having the first performance LED 304, is placed on the front side of the base member 301, and the front side is covered by the cover member 302. However, because the cover member 302 is made of a synthetic resin material with translucency, it is possible for the player to see the front of the base member 301 and the LED board 303 through the cover member 302.

Here, by arranging the base member 301, which is also black, around (around) the black LED board 303, the LED board 303 blends in with the surrounding base member 301, making the boundary BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 less obvious. In other words, it becomes difficult to tell that the LED board 303 is provided on part of the front surface of the base member 301, so the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11(B), when the cover member 302 is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with the LED board 303 placed in the recess 312 of the base member 301, the cover member 302 is positioned high so as to cover the front sides of the base member 301 and the LED board 303. While the front sides of the base member 301 and the LED board 303 can be easily seen from the player side through the first light-transmitting portion 321, it is difficult for the player to see the first performance LED 304 through the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B. In addition, the milky or semi-transparent decorative portions 331A to 331E on the cover member 302 are arranged on the front sides of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, so that the milky or semi-transparent decorative pattern 331 can be seen on the front side of the black background.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, when the cover member 302 is placed on the front side of the base member 301, a specific decorative pattern 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) among the multiple decorative patterns 331 is formed (provided) so as to straddle the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player's side. In more detail, the decorative parts 331B and 331C consisting of inclined lines are arranged so as to intersect with the boundary part BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 facing in the left-right direction, and one decorative pattern 331 is provided across two members (the LED board 303 and the cover member 302), so that the one decorative pattern 331 looks as if it is provided on one member, making it difficult to recognize that the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 on the back side are separate members.

In addition, part of the boundary BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 is difficult to see from the player due to the decorative parts 331B, 331C that overlap on the front side, making the LED board 303 less noticeable. Note that because the decorative parts 331B, 331C are linear, even if they are positioned to overlap the front side of the boundary BD, the area that overlaps with the boundary BD is small. However, because the decorative pattern 331 is formed over almost the entire front area of the LED board 303 and the cover member 302, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 are separate members.

The decorative portion 331A of each decorative pattern 331 is arranged approximately parallel to the boundary portion BD, making it difficult to distinguish because of its similar appearance to the boundary portion BD. Also, if it is arranged closer to the front side of the boundary portion BD and is milky white, which is brighter than black, it stands out, making the LED board 303 less noticeable. Furthermore, by arranging the decorative portion 331A so that it overlaps the boundary portion BD, it may be possible to make part of the boundary portion BD difficult to see from the player's side by the decorative portion 331A.

In addition, these decorative parts 331A to 331C are formed in a linear shape in the same way as the printed wiring 320 provided on the LED board 303, and are arranged approximately parallel to a part of the printed wiring 320, so that the wiring pattern and form of the printed wiring 320 are similar (or the same), making it difficult to distinguish them, and therefore the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable.

Furthermore, although the decorative parts 331D and 331E differ in appearance from the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD, they are thicker and have a larger area than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD, and therefore stand out more than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD. In addition, a portion of the decorative parts 331D and 331E is arranged overlapping the front side of the printed wiring 320, making the printed wiring 320 less visible, and therefore the LED board 303 is less noticeable.

In addition, a decorative pattern 341 consisting of linear convex portions that are flattened vertically and hexagonally shaped is provided on the front surface of each rear wall portion 313A-313D of the base member 301 so as to be visible to the player. This decorative pattern 341 is similar in appearance (or common) to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320, so that a decorative pattern 341 similar in appearance to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320 can be formed even in areas of the base member 301 that are not covered by the cover member 302, making the LED board 303 less noticeable.

The base member 301 also has rear wall portions 313A-313D as predetermined areas that can be seen from the player's side without seeing through the cover member 302, and the rear wall portions 313A-313D are provided with decorative pattern 341 as a predetermined decorative pattern that is the same or similar in appearance to decorative pattern 331 provided on the cover member 302. This makes it difficult to tell that the base member 301 and the cover member 302 are different members, making the LED board 303 less noticeable.

In addition, the LED board 303 is disposed in a recess 312 formed in the lower part of the base member 301, and is therefore located lower than the upper region of the recess 312 in the base member 301, i.e., away from the image display device 5. This makes it less noticeable as it is located away from the image display device 5, which is where the player focuses their attention.

In this way, a specific decorative pattern 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) among the multiple decorative patterns 331 is arranged to straddle the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player's side, making the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, less noticeable. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 303 that should not be shown to the player from the standpoint of appearance and design can be arranged on the front side where they can be viewed from the player's side, thereby increasing design freedom.

(Variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the variable winning ball unit 700 will be briefly described with reference to Fig. 10-13. Fig. 10-13 (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line F-F of (A).

As shown in Figures 10-13, the variable winning ball unit 700 has a base member 701 that is attached to the front side of the play surface plate 200, and a cover member 702 that is provided on the front side of the base member 701, and is configured as a unit in which the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are integrally provided.

The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided at the top right of the variable winning ball unit 700, and the variable winning ball device 6B is provided at the bottom left. Between the base plate 701A of the base member 701 and the cover plate 702A of the cover member 702, there is a game ball path 705A through which the game ball (game ball P) can enter the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7, and a game ball path 705B through which the game ball (game ball P) can enter the second starting winning opening of the variable winning ball device 6B. In addition, below the special variable winning ball device 7, there is an LED board 703 on which multiple performance LEDs 704 capable of emitting light forward are provided.

The base member 701 and the cover member 702 are made of a translucent synthetic resin material. Therefore, the game balls passing through the game ball paths 705A and 705B can be seen from the player's side through the cover plate 702A.

(First performance unit 300 and variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the first performance unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 will be explained based on Fig. 10-14 to Fig. 10-16. Fig. 10-14 (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first performance unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. Fig. 10-15 is a diagram for comparing the first performance unit and the variable winning ball unit. Fig. 10-16 is a diagram for explaining similar colors.

First, as shown in Figure 10-3, the first presentation unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side on the left and right below the image display device 5, and are arranged so that the right end of the first presentation unit 300 overlaps or is close to the left end of the variable winning ball unit 700 when viewed from the player's side. Also, as shown in Figures 10-4 and 10-13 (B), the front of the variable winning ball unit 700 is positioned on the front side of the board 200, while the first presentation unit 300 is positioned on the rear side of the board 200.

As shown in Figures 10-14 (A) and (B), the front-to-rear dimension L1A, which is the thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the first light-transmitting portion 321 of the first performance unit 300, is longer than the front-to-rear dimension L1B, which is the thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B (L1A > L1B).

In the first light-transmitting portion 321 of the cover member 302, the transmittance of light transmitted in the T direction among the light that enters from the front in a direction (T direction) perpendicular to the front surface of the first light-transmitting portion 321 is XA%. In addition, in the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302, the transmittance of light transmitted in the T direction among the light that enters from the front in a direction (T direction) perpendicular to the front surface of the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B is XB%. In other words, not all (100%) of the light that enters the first light-transmitting portion 321 or the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B from the front is transmitted in the T direction, and some of the light is reflected at the front surface or emitted in a direction different from the T direction at the rear (to spread around). In particular, the second light-transmitting sections 322A and 322B have a light diffusion section 322C formed on the back surface, which is made of uneven surfaces, and therefore transmit light more easily in directions other than the T direction than the first light-transmitting section 321, and therefore the light transmittance in the T direction is lower than the transmittance of the first light-transmitting section 321 (low light transmittance; XA%>XB%).

As shown in Fig. 10-14(C) and (D), the transmittance of light that enters the cover plate 702A from the front in a direction perpendicular to the front surface (T direction) and is transmitted in the T direction is Y%. Here, the front-to-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A is shorter than the front-to-rear dimensions L1A, L1B of the first light transmitting portion 321 and the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302 (L2<L1A, L2<L1B), so that the light that enters from the front surface is guided in the T direction inside and is less likely to diffuse to the surroundings before being emitted from the back surface. Also, since the cover plate 702A is a flat plate without a light diffusion portion like the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B, the transmittance of light in the T direction of the cover plate 702A is higher than the transmittance of light in the T direction of the cover member 302 (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%).

In other words, the translucency of the cover member 302 is lower than that of the cover plate 702A, so that visibility is lower when a specific part on the back side of the cover member 302 (e.g., the first performance LED 304 or the LED board 303) is viewed through the cover member 302 from the player's side than when a specific part on the back side of the cover plate 702A is viewed through the cover plate 702A from the player's side, making the LED board 303 including the first performance LED 304, which is an electronic component, less noticeable.

As shown in FIG. 10-15, the first performance unit 300 has an LED board 303 including the first performance LED 304, which is an electronic component, and a base member 301 arranged around it that are the same color (black), making the LED board 303 less noticeable. In addition, the front-to-rear dimensions L1A, L1B of the cover member 302 of the first performance unit 300 are longer than the front-to-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700 (L1A, L1B>L2), and the light transmittance in the T direction of the cover member 302 of the first performance unit 300 (XA%, XA%) is lower than the light transmittance in the T direction of the cover member 702 of the variable winning ball unit 700 (Y%) (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%), making the LED board 303 less noticeable.

Therefore, when the first presentation unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700, which is located in a different position (to the right) from the first presentation unit 300, are viewed from the player's side, the visibility of the LED board 303 viewed through the cover member 302 is lower than the visibility of the game ball P viewed through the cover member 702, so the LED board 303, which is located on the back side of the cover member 302, which is a translucent member, appears less visible compared to the variable winning ball unit 700 located near the first presentation unit 300. Also, because the cover member 302 is located on the back side of the cover plate 702A and the base member 301 and the LED board 303 are black, which is a dark color, the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of this embodiment, the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301, which is a specific member arranged around it, are the same color (black), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electronic component and the specific member do not have to be the same color, and may be, for example, the same or similar colors.

Color has three attributes: hue (color tone), value (brightness), and saturation (vividness). "Similar colors" include: 1. combinations of colors that have the same tone (hue group with the same value (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) and are adjacent in terms of hue (adjacent colors), 2. combinations of the same hue but different tones, and 3. combinations of colors that differ only in value or saturation.

Here, an example of "1. Combination of adjacent colors (adjacent colors) with the same tone (hue group with the same lightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness))" above will be explained based on Figure 10-16. When the three primary colors of colorants, cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y), are arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees on a hue wheel of a given number (24 colors in this case), each of the three colors will be dissimilar to one another. Colors with a hue difference within an angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on this hue wheel are "similar colors," and combinations are not limited to adjacent colors that are adjacent to each other on the hue wheel.

For example, if cyan (C) is the reference color, colors that fall within a range of 30 degrees toward the magenta (M) side and 30 degrees toward the yellow (Y) side (total of 60 degrees) are similar to cyan (C), if magenta (M) is the reference color, colors that fall within a range of 30 degrees toward the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees toward the yellow (Y) side (total of 60 degrees) are similar to magenta (M), and if yellow (Y) is the reference color, colors that fall within a range of 30 degrees toward the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees toward the magenta (M) side (total of 60 degrees) are similar to yellow (Y). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the hue wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, combinations of colors that have a hue difference within the range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel can be considered "similar colors."

Furthermore, it is preferable that similar colors include combinations of colors that are included in warm colors, such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that give a warm feeling, and cool colors, such as blue and purple, which are chromatic colors that give a cold feeling, as well as combinations of colors that are included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors that are intermediate between warm and cool colors, such as green and purple.

(Second performance unit 400)
Next, the second performance unit 400 will be described based on Fig. 10-17 to Fig. 10-19. Fig. 10-17 (A) is a front view showing the second performance unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second performance unit with the cover member removed. Fig. 10-18 (A) is a G-G cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-17 (A), and (B) is an H-H cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-17 (A). Fig. 10-19 (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second performance unit.

As shown in Figures 10-17 and 10-18, the second performance unit 400 is mainly composed of a base member 401, a cover member 402 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 401, an LED board 403 attached to the front side of the base member 401, and an inner lens 405 arranged on the front side of the LED board 403, and as shown in Figure 10-3, it is installed on the right side of the light guide plate 501 so that it can be seen through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 401 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and is roughly crescent-shaped when viewed from the front, with its surfaces (front, rear and periphery) being white.

The LED board 403 has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a boss protruding from the front of the base member 401. A plurality of second performance LEDs 404A, 404B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front of the LED board 403. A plurality of second performance LEDs 404C capable of emitting light upward and a plurality of second performance LEDs 404D capable of emitting light downward and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the back of the LED board 403. The second performance LEDs 404A to 404D are angle LEDs capable of emitting light parallel or approximately parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 403. The surface of the LED board 403 (insulating parts excluding the printed wiring on the front and back) is white.

The inner lens 405 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material and is formed to be approximately the same shape as the LED board 403. It is disposed between a plurality of second performance LEDs 404A arranged along the upper edge of the front surface of the LED board 403 and a plurality of second performance LEDs 404B arranged along the lower edge of the front surface of the LED board 403, so that light from the second performance LEDs 404A is incident on the front end surface and light from the second performance LEDs 404B is incident on the rear end surface.

As shown in FIG. 10-18(A), the light incident from the second performance LEDs 404A, 404B is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 406 on the back surface of the inner lens 405, and is emitted forward approximately evenly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405. The front surface of the inner lens 405 is flat, so it emits light from the surface like a light guide plate.

The reflective portion 406 is formed with an uneven state (rough surface) that forms a generally triangular wave shape with a constant pitch when viewed in cross section in the direction of light guided inside the inner lens 405. Specifically, it is configured by a molding method in which unevenness is formed on the back surface of the inner lens 405 by using a stamper or injection, but the reflective portion may also be configured by, for example, a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, an adhesive dot method in which an acrylic plate and a reflective plate are attached with a dot-shaped adhesive, a groove processing method, etc.

The cover member 402 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open back, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 401 and the LED board 403. At a position on the front surface of the cover member 402 corresponding to the LED board 403, a protrusion 410 having a shape that is slightly enlarged from the LED board 403 when viewed from the front protrudes forward.

A decorative portion 420 consisting of the letter "V" (logotype) is provided on the front surface of the convex portion 410 in a light-transmitting manner by printing with a translucent colored paint or by attaching a translucent sheet on which letters are printed. In addition, a light diffusion portion 402A consisting of an uneven portion is formed on the rear surface of the convex portion 410, and the light from the inner lens 405 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In the upper region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex ridge portions 421A protruding toward the back surface are provided extending in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the second performance LEDs 404C. In addition, in the lower region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex ridge portions 421B protruding toward the back surface are provided extending in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the second performance LEDs 404D. Note that a light diffusion portion made of uneven portions may also be formed in the portion of the back surface of the cover member 402 where the convex ridge portions 421A, 421B are not formed. In addition, the cover member 402 is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear from the convex portion 410 upward and downward.

The multiple convex rib sections 421A, 421B have a continuous uneven portion formed on the rear end surface, and a step portion 421C is formed at a midpoint in the longitudinal direction, and are extended from the convex portion 410 so as to slope upward and downward toward the rear. This allows the light emitted upward and downward from the second performance LEDs 404C, 404D to enter through these uneven portions and step portion 421C, and the entered light is diffused by the uneven portions and emitted forward.

In this way, when the second performance LEDs 404A, 404B emit light, the light from the second performance LEDs 404A, 404B is emitted forward by the inner lens 405 and enters the area corresponding to the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402, causing the entire front area of the convex portion 410, including the decorative portion 420, to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 10-19(A), the LED board 403, which is an electronic component having the second performance LEDs 404A-404D, is disposed on the front side of the base member 401, and the front side is covered by the cover member 402. However, because the cover member 402 is formed from a synthetic resin material having translucency, even if a light diffusion section is formed on the cover member 402 in a portion other than the convex rib portions 421A, 421B from the player's side, it is possible to see the front of the base member 401 and the LED board 403 through the portions other than the convex rib portions 421A, 421B.

As shown in FIG. 10-19(B), the white base member 401 is disposed around (near) the white LED board 403, so that the LED board 403 blends in with the surrounding base member 401, making it difficult to see the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the cover member 402. In other words, it is difficult to see that the LED board 403 is provided on part of the front surface of the base member 401, so that the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, is less noticeable.

As shown in FIG. 10-19(A), the decorative portion 420 provided on the front side of the convex portion 410 is provided at a position that corresponds to a part of the upper and lower sides of the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, and the base member 401 when viewed from the player's side. In other words, a part of the decorative portion 420 is arranged so that it overlaps with a part of the boundary portion BD on the front side of the boundary portion BD, and the decorative portion 420 makes a part of the boundary portion BD less visible, making the LED board 403 less noticeable. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 403 that should not be shown to the player from the standpoint of appearance and design can be provided on the front side where they can be seen by the player, thereby increasing the degree of design freedom.

In addition, the decorative portion 420 is arranged so that the area covering (overlapping) the front side of the boundary portion BD is larger than that of the decorative pattern 331 described above, making the boundary portion BD less visible and thus making the LED board 403 less noticeable.

In this embodiment, the decorative portion 420 is illustrated as partially overlapping (partially overlapping) positions that correspond to parts of the upper and lower edges of the boundary portion BD when viewed from the player's side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portion 420 may be arranged at positions that correspond to all parts of the boundary portion BD. In addition, it is preferable that the decorative portion 420 is arranged so as to overlap at least about 1/3 of the boundary portion BD.

In addition, the decorative portion 420 displays the letter "V" as a logotype, so that players focus on the logotype and are less likely to be aware of the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, making the LED board 403 less noticeable.

In this embodiment, the letter "V" indicating a jackpot is used as the logotype, but the present invention is not limited to this, and letters indicating variable display results such as "jackpot", "BONUS", and "RUSH", letters suggesting a jackpot such as "hot", "super hot", and "!!", and letters such as the model name of the gaming machine, the title, and the names of characters that appear may also be used. Furthermore, in addition to letters, decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, and patterns may also be displayed as decorative parts.

In addition, the LED board 403 has a second performance LED 404A as a light-emitting means capable of illuminating the decorative part 420, so that the decorative part 420 stands out due to the light emitted, making it difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, and therefore making the LED board 403 less noticeable.

In addition, the second performance LED 404A is provided with a decorative part 420 that can emit surface light through the inner lens 405. This makes the decorative part 420 stand out due to the surface emission, making it difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, and therefore making the LED board 403 less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decorative part 420 is a single decorative part consisting of the letter "V", but the present invention is not limited to this. When multiple decorative parts 420 are provided in the region of the convex part 410 of the cover member 402, and multiple predetermined decorative parts (e.g., patterns, etc.) having a different form from the decorative part 420 are provided in the region other than the convex part 410 of the cover member 402, it is preferable that the number of the multiple decorative parts is greater than the number of the predetermined decorative parts. In this way, the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 is made less visible by the multiple decorative parts, and the number of the multiple decorative parts is greater than the number of the multiple predetermined decorative parts provided in other regions, making the LED board 403 less noticeable.

In this case, the multiple decorative parts and the multiple specified decorative parts only need to have different aspects. For example, the specified decorative parts may be enlarged or reduced aspects of the decorative parts, or may differ in any one of the outer shape, form, color, size, etc.

The cover member 402 also has a convex portion 410 which is a boundary corresponding area corresponding to the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, and an area other than the convex portion 410 which does not correspond to the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, and the light transmittance of the convex portion 410 may be lower than the light transmittance of the area other than the convex portion 410. By doing this, it becomes difficult for a player to see the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 through the convex portion 410, so that the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

(Third production unit 600 and fourth production unit 800)
Next, the third performance unit 600 and the fourth performance unit 800 will be described based on Fig. 10-20 to Fig. 10-26. Fig. 10-20 (A) is a front view showing the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. Fig. 10-21 (A) is an I-I cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-20, and (B) is a J-J cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-20. Fig. 10-22 is a K-K cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-20. Fig. 10-23 is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility of the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. Fig. 10-24 is a diagram showing the configuration of the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. Fig. 10-25 is a diagram showing the performance mode when the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit emit light. Fig. 10-26 (A) is a schematic front view showing the state where the third performance unit is located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing the state where the third performance unit is located at the performance position.

(Third performance unit 600)
As shown in Fig. 10-20, Fig. 10-21(A) and Fig. 10-26, the third performance unit 600 includes a base member 601, a cover member 602 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 601, an LED board 603 attached to the front side of the base member 601, and an inner lens 605 arranged on the front side of the LED board 603. The third performance unit 600 includes a light-emitting performance unit 630, and a light-emitting performance unit 630 that can be moved between the origin position shown in Fig. 10-26(A) and the performance position shown in Fig. 10-26(B). The pachinko game machine 75SG001 has a performance motor 631 (see Figure 10-2) which is a drive source that enables vertical movement between the pachinko game machine 75SG001 and the light-emitting performance unit 630, and a power transmission member 632 for transmitting the power of the performance motor 631 to the light-emitting performance unit 630. As shown in Figure 10-20, the performance motor 631 is provided at the top of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 601 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and is generally trapezoidal in front view, with its surfaces (front, rear and periphery) being white.

The LED board 603 has a generally trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a vertical wall that protrudes from the front periphery of the base member 601. A plurality of third performance LEDs 604A, 604B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front of the LED board 603. The third performance LEDs 604A, 604B are capable of emitting light forward. The surface of the LED board 603 (insulating parts excluding the printed wiring on the front and back) is white. The cable C that connects the LED board 603 and the performance control board 12 is wired along the power transmission member 632 (see Figure 10-26).

The inner lens 605 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, is formed to be roughly the same shape as the LED board 603, and is positioned so as to cover from the front side the multiple third performance LEDs 604A, 604B that are arranged in front of the LED board 603.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(A), the front and back surfaces of the inner lens 605 are provided with a light diffusion section 605A made of uneven surfaces that diffuses and emits light from the third performance LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the back surface toward the front, thereby allowing surface emission.

The cover member 602 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open back, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 601 and the LED board 603.

A decorative portion 620 consisting of the letters "XXX" (logotype) is provided on the front surface of the cover member 602 in a light-transmitting manner by printing with a translucent colored paint or by attaching a translucent sheet on which the letters are printed. In addition, a light diffusion portion 602A consisting of uneven portions is formed on the rear surface of the cover member 602, which diffuses the light from the inner lens 605 and enables it to be emitted forward.

In this embodiment, the logotype is exemplified as the letters "XXX" indicating a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and letters such as the model name of the gaming machine, the title, and the names of the characters that appear, letters indicating variable display results such as "jackpot," "BONUS," and "RUSH," and letters suggesting a jackpot such as "hot," "super hot," and "!!" may also be used. Furthermore, in addition to letters, decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, and patterns may also be displayed as decorative parts.

In this way, when the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B of the third performance unit 600 emit light, the light emitted forward from the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B passes through the inner lens 605 and is further diffused and emitted forward through the cover member 602, causing the entire front area of the cover member 602, including the decorative portion 620, to emit light.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the multiple third performance LEDs 604A are arranged along the periphery of the letters "XXX" that make up the decorative part 620, and the multiple third performance LEDs 604B are arranged in a position that does not correspond to the decorative part 620. By arranging the multiple third performance LEDs 604A along the periphery of the letters "XXX" that make up the decorative part 620 in this way, when the third performance LEDs 604A emit light, the periphery of the letters "XXX" glows in a dot pattern, making it easier to recognize the shape of the decorative part 620.

The power transmission member 632, which constitutes part of the power transmission member that transmits power to the light-emitting performance unit 630, is an arm member with one end rotatably supported around a pivot axis facing in the front-to-rear direction and the light-emitting performance unit 630 attached to the other end, but the power transmission member can be modified in various ways, and may be a rack gear and pinion gear, etc., as long as it is capable of transmitting power so as to move the light-emitting performance unit 630 in the up-down direction.

(Fourth production unit 800)
As shown in Figures 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the fourth performance unit 800 is mainly composed of a base member 801, a cover member 802 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 801, an LED board 803 attached to the front side of the base member 801, and an inner lens 805 arranged on the front side of the LED board 803, and is arranged in the upper left corner of the area surrounded by the guide rail 211 so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the face plate 200 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001, as shown in Figure 10-20.

The base member 801 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and is formed in a box shape with an open front, and part of the periphery is formed in an arc shape so as to follow the guide rail 211. In addition, the surface (front, rear and periphery) is white.

The LED board 803 is formed so that its shape in front view is smaller than that of the base member 801, and is attached to the front end of a boss (not shown) erected on the front surface of the base member 801. A plurality of fourth performance LEDs 804 and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 803. The fourth performance LEDs 804 are angled LEDs capable of emitting light parallel or nearly parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 803, and are arranged in plurality along the periphery of the front surface of the LED board 803. In addition, the surface of the LED board 803 (insulating parts excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 805 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material and is placed on the front surface of the LED board 803 in an area surrounded by the multiple fourth performance LEDs 804.

As shown in FIG. 10-21 (B), the light incident from the fourth performance LED 804 is reflected forward by a reflecting section 806 on the back surface of the inner lens 805, and is emitted forward approximately evenly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 805. The front surface of the inner lens 805 is flat, so it emits light from a surface like a light guide plate.

The cover member 802 is formed from a synthetic resin material having translucency (transparent), and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 801 and the LED board 803. In detail, the cover member 802 does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801A that is provided on the front peripheral edge of the base member 801, which is a portion that is aligned with the guide rail 211, but covers the front end of the standing wall 801B other than the portion that is aligned with the guide rail 211. In addition, a light diffusion section 802A made of uneven parts is formed on the back surface of the cover member 802, which is able to diffuse the light from the inner lens 805 and emit it forward.

In this way, when the fourth performance LED 804 of the fourth performance unit 800 emits light, the light emitted forward from the fourth performance LED 804 passes through the inner lens 805, and is then diffused and emitted forward through the cover member 802, causing the entire front surface of the cover member 802 to emit light.

Next, the third performance unit 600 and the fourth performance unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-24, the surfaces of the base members 601, 801 and the LED boards 603, 803 of the third performance unit 600 and the fourth performance unit 800 are the same color, white, and the front sides of these base members 601, 801 and LED boards 603, 803 are covered with translucent cover members 602, 802, making them light-emitting performance bodies whose front surfaces emit light when the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B and the fourth performance LED 804 are turned on.

As shown in Fig. 10-20 and Fig. 10-21(A), the LED board 603 as an electronic component having the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B is disposed on the front side of the base member 601, and the front side is covered by the cover member 602. However, since the cover member 602 is formed of a synthetic resin material having translucency, even if the cover member 602 has a light diffusion section 602A formed thereon, it is possible for the player to see the rear side through the cover member 602. However, since the inner lens 605 having light diffusion sections 605A formed on the front and rear surfaces is provided on the rear side so as to cover the LED board 603 from the front side, it is extremely difficult to see the front side of the LED board 603, although it is possible to see the front side of the LED board 603.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(A), by arranging the upright walls of the base member 601, which is also white, around the white LED board 603, the LED board 603 blends in with the surrounding base member 601, making it difficult to see the boundary BD between the LED board 603 and the cover member 602. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 603 is provided on the base member 601, and therefore the LED board 603, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the LED board 803 as an electronic component having the fourth performance LED 804 is disposed on the front side of the base member 801, and the front side is covered by the cover member 802. However, because the cover member 802 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, even if the cover member 802 has a light diffusion portion 802A formed thereon, it is possible for the player to see the front of the base member 801 and the LED board 803 through the cover member 802.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(B), a white base member 801 is placed around (near) a white LED board 803, so that the LED board 803 blends in with the surrounding base member 801, making it difficult to see the boundary BD between the LED board 803 and the cover member 802. In other words, it is difficult to see that the LED board 803 is provided on part of the front surface of the base member 801, so that the LED board 803, which is an electronic component, is less noticeable.

However, the fourth performance LED 804 is an angled LED that receives light from the side end surface of the inner lens 805, and is arranged along the periphery of the LED board 803, so that the front side of the front periphery of the LED board 803 including the fourth performance LED 804 is not covered by the inner lens 805, and the inner lens 805 has a smaller area in which the reflecting portion and light diffusing portion are formed than the inner lens 605, so that the visibility when the LED board 803 including the fourth performance LED 804 is viewed through the inner lens 805 from the player's side is higher than the visibility when the LED board 603 including the third performance LEDs 604A and 604B is viewed through the inner lens 605 from the player's side. In other words, the LED board 803 is more noticeable than the LED board 603.

As shown in FIG. 10-24, the light-emitting performance section 630 of the third performance unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth performance unit 800 when viewed from the player's side (see FIG. 10-20), and the front-to-back position of the front side is further forward (toward the player) than the front side of the fourth performance unit 800 (see FIG. 10-22 and FIG. 10-23). Furthermore, the light-emitting mode of the fourth performance LED 804 of the fourth performance unit 800 is surface light-emitting, while the light-emitting mode of the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B of the third performance unit 600 is point light (see FIG. 10-25). Note that in FIG. 10-25, for the convenience of explaining the light-emitting modes, the background of the third performance unit 600 and the fourth performance unit 800 is shown in black.

In this way, the light-emitting performance section 630 of the third performance unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth performance unit 800 when viewed from the player's side, is located closer to the player, and emits a stronger light, so that it is a performance means with higher visibility when viewed from the player's side than the fourth performance unit 800. In other words, the third performance unit 600, which is a performance means with higher visibility when viewed from the player's side than the fourth performance unit 800, is provided in the vicinity of the fourth performance unit 800, and since the third performance unit 600 stands out more than the fourth performance unit 800 and attracts more attention from players, the LED board 803, which is an electronic component of the fourth performance unit 800, becomes less noticeable.

In this embodiment, the light-emitting performance section 630 of the third performance unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth performance unit 800 when viewed from the player's side, is located closer to the player, and emits stronger light, making it a more visible performance device than the LED board 803 and base member 801. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the light-emitting performance section 630 of the third performance unit 600 has higher visibility by being different from the LED board 803 of the fourth performance unit 800 in at least one of the following aspects: size when viewed from the player's side, position relative to the player, and light emission aspect.

The visibility of the light-emitting performance section 630 may be easily increased by coloring the front surface of the light-emitting performance section 630 of the third performance unit 600 as a performance means in a color that is more visible than the surface color of the LED board 803, providing a decorative section in a highly visible color, or using a cover member 602 molded in a highly visible color. Furthermore, the visibility of the light-emitting performance section 630 may be easily increased by the light-emitting mode (e.g., lighting color, lighting mode, brightness, etc.) of the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B.

In addition, the presenter has exemplified a form in which the light-emitting performance section 630 of the third performance unit 600, which can emit light using a light-emitting means and can be operated by a performance motor 631, is used as the performance means, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance means may be light-emitting means (such as a lamp section) provided around the periphery of the fourth performance unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3, or the performance means may not emit light using a light-emitting means, or it may be a performance section that is fixed in a predetermined position and is not operated by a specified drive source.

As shown in FIG. 10-23, a protrusion 3A (eaves) that protrudes further forward than the game board 2 and glass window 50a is formed on the upper front surface of the game machine frame 3. The protrusion 3A is formed above the game area Y so as not to obstruct the view of the game balls passing over the top of the game area Y, but because it protrudes forward so much, for example, when the pachinko game machine 75SG001 is installed on a game island in an amusement center, the area E1 below the protrusion 3A (the area shown by dots in the figure) becomes dark because the outside light from the amusement center is blocked by the protrusion 3A and casts a shadow.

Therefore, by providing the third performance unit 600 and the fourth performance unit 800 at a position corresponding to area E1 at the top of the play area Y, the LED boards 603, 803 are more likely to blend into the shadow of the protrusion 3A, making them less noticeable.

In addition, above the LED boards 603, 803, there is a protrusion 3A that protrudes further toward the player than the LED boards 603, 803. Since the protrusion 3A is larger than the LED boards 603, 803 (see Figure 10-23), the LED boards 603, 803 are in the shadow of the protrusion 3A, making them less noticeable.

In addition, while the LED boards 603, 803 and base members 601, 801 are shown in white, the present invention is not limited to this and they may be dark in color (e.g., black). In this way, the LED boards 603, 803 and base members 601, 801 will blend in more easily with the shadow of the protrusion 3A, making them less noticeable.

In this embodiment, the protrusion 3A protruding toward the player above the LED boards 603 and 803 is used as a protrusion that protrudes toward the player above the electronic components and specific components. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the protrusion is not limited to a protrusion that protrudes from a part of the gaming machine frame 3, but may be, for example, composed of other gaming devices (e.g., winning ball devices, etc.) or presentation devices provided on the gaming board 2 or the gaming area Y. In addition, the protrusion 3A may not only be fixed to the front of the gaming machine frame 3, but may also be a protrusion that protrudes toward the player above the electronic components and specific components by moving from the origin position to the protruding position at a predetermined timing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-26, the light-emitting area 506 of the light guide plate 501 is formed to overlap front to back with most of the movement area E2 (area surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 10-26) when the light-emitting performance section 630 and power transmission member 632 of the third performance unit 600 operating on the rear side of the light guide plate 501 move.

In more detail, the movement area E2 of the light-emitting performance unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 is the area in which the light-emitting performance unit 630 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and is an area that includes the origin position and the performance position. When light is incident on the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, the light-emitting area 506 becomes luminous, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 at the rear, the light-emitting performance unit 630, and the power transmission member 632 become difficult or impossible to see from the player side through the light guide plate 501. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 executes a light-emitting performance in which the light guide plate LEDs 502 are turned on and the light-emitting area 506 is illuminated during at least the movement period in which the light-emitting performance unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 are moved from the origin position to the performance position and during the performance period in which they are located at the performance position. This makes it difficult or impossible for the player to see the light-emitting performance unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 through the light guide plate 501, and therefore makes it possible to prevent the cable C (electronic component) and the like that is arranged along the power transmission member 632 from being noticeable during the movement period and performance period.

In addition, after the light-emitting performance unit 630 has moved to the performance position, when the light guide plate LED 502 is turned off and the light-emitting performance of the light-emitting area 506 ends, the power transmission member 632, cable C, etc. become visible, but by turning on the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B of the light-emitting performance unit 630 to make the light-emitting performance unit 630 stand out, the power transmission member 632 and cable C can be made less noticeable.

Furthermore, electronic components that are arranged to be operable in this manner (for example, the LED board 603 and cable C) may be visible to the player during the waiting period when they are waiting at the origin position or during the movement period, but it is preferable to make them difficult or impossible to see from the player at least during the performance period when they are in the performance position. In this way, it is possible to prevent the electronic components from standing out during the performance period when the player is paying attention.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 of the characteristic part 75SG of this embodiment is,
Electronic components (e.g., LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) that are visible to the player;
A specific member (e.g., base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a light-transmitting member and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic components and the specific member through the member;
The present invention is characterized by the following:
By doing this, even if the electronic components are arranged so that they are visible to the player, the specific materials of similar colors make the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing the freedom of design.
The electronic components and the specific members may be changed to any color as long as they are similar in color, including the electronic components and the specific members having the same color (e.g., black and black, white and white, etc.) as in the above embodiment.

(Description of Variations and Applications of Feature 75SG)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, an example is given of a form in which LED boards 303, 403, 603, and 803 are provided with light-emitting diodes such as the first performance LED 304, the second performance LEDs 404A-404D, the third performance LED 604A and 604B, and the fourth performance LED 804 as electronic components, but the present invention is not limited to this and includes circuit boards that do not have light-emitting diodes (including the main board 11 that is not used for performance, the performance control board 12, relay boards, etc.), electronic components such as sensors, solenoids, motors, connectors, and cables (wiring), as well as boards and members that secure these.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the specific member is the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 for arranging the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As described above, the specific member does not have to be a member constituting part of the unit (device) in which the electronic component is arranged or housed, but as long as it is a member provided around the electronic component, it may be a different member provided separately from the unit (device) in which the electronic component is arranged or housed (for example, a member constituting part of another unit, or a member constituting part of the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3).

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 constituting part of the unit (apparatus) in which the electronic components are arranged or housed are exemplified as the translucent member, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the member does not have to be a part of the unit (apparatus) in which the electronic components are arranged or housed as described above, but as long as it is a translucent member that allows the player to see the electronic components and specific members through the member, it may be a different member provided separately from the unit (apparatus) in which the electronic components are arranged or housed (for example, a member that constitutes part of another unit, or a member that constitutes part of the game board 2 or game machine frame 3).

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, an example is given in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component are the same color (same color), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component are the same color as described above, the present invention is not limited to the electronic component and the specific member being the same color.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as the specific member is partially overlapped on the back side of the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as the electronic component, and the non-overlapping portion is arranged around the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electronic component and the specific member may be arranged side by side on at least one of the upper, lower, left, and right sides without overlapping when viewed from the player's side. Also, as long as the specific member appears to be arranged around the electronic component when viewed from the player's side, the electronic component and the specific member may be arranged separately in the up-down direction, left-right direction, front-back direction, etc.

The specific component provided around the electronic component includes a specific component provided in a position that is visible to the player together with the electronic component, and may include, for example, a specific component located within a range of approximately 5 cm away from the electronic component.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 made of a translucent synthetic resin material are used as the translucent member, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any material may be used as long as it is a translucent material, and may be glass material, for example. Furthermore, as long as the player can see the electronic components and specific members through the member, it may be transparent or semi-transparent, or may be colored a specified color. Furthermore, the light transmittance does not have to be 100% or a value close to 100%.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the cover member 302, 402, 602, 802 as a translucent member is exemplified as a form in which the player can see through the member to see the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component and part or all of the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific component, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as at least part of the electronic component is arranged to be visible through the member, it is sufficient that the electronic component and the specific component are arranged to be visible together, even if at least part of the specific component is not arranged to be visible through the member.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the cover member 302, 402, 602, 802 as the translucent member is arranged on the front side of the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as the electronic component and the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as the specific component so as to be aligned with the electronic component and the specific component, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it does not necessarily have to be arranged so as to be aligned with the electronic component and the specific component. In other words, the electronic component and the specific component may be arranged in a state inclined obliquely with respect to the translucent member.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 and the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 have an entire surface of a predetermined color (black or white), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the colors of the parts of the electronic components and specific components that can be seen through the translucent member (for example, the front color of the electronic components and specific components) are similar colors, the entire surface does not necessarily have to be similar colors. In addition, the colors of these electronic components and specific components may be applied when the components are molded, or may be applied by painting or printing after molding, or may be the specified color by attaching a sticker or the like.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, an embodiment in which the electronic components and the specific members provided around the electronic components are the same color (same color) has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific electronic component (e.g., the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the solenoid 81, etc.) that is provided in a manner that is difficult or impossible for the player to see, separate from the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component and the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific member, may be provided in a manner that is difficult or impossible for the player to see. In a light source having a predetermined electronic component (e.g., first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) and a predetermined component (e.g., components for fixing first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) provided around the predetermined electronic component, it is preferable that the predetermined electronic component (e.g., first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) is a non-similar color to the predetermined component (e.g., components for fixing first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.).

In this way, for the specified electronic components such as the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the solenoids 81 and 82, which are installed in a way that is difficult or impossible for the player to see, generic products can be used without having to consider the tradeoff with the specified parts that secure them, thereby reducing manufacturing costs.

In addition, by making the color of the specific component the same hue but with either a higher brightness or saturation than the color of the electronic component, the specific component becomes more visible than the electronic component, making it possible to make the electronic component less conspicuous in comparison.

In addition, by coloring the translucent member in the same color as the electronic components and specific components, the translucent member blends in with the electronic components and specific components, making the electronic components less noticeable.

For example, if an electronic component such as a black LED board is placed on the right side of the game board 2, an outer rail decoration 212 of the same color or a similar color as the electronic component can be placed on the left side of the game board 2 on the opposite side of the image display device 5, separate from the specific component placed around the electronic component, so that it is visible to the player. This allows the black components to be placed in a balanced manner on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, making it less likely for the player to feel uncomfortable, and making the electronic component less noticeable. In this way, by symmetrically placing components of the same color or a similar color as the electronic component at a distance, separate from the specific component, the electronic component can be made less noticeable.

The configuration related to feature 75SG may be appropriately combined with some or all of the configurations related to feature 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, 02AK, etc. For example, if the effects described in feature 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, 02AK can be executed on image display device 5, the electronic components of first effect unit 300, second effect unit 400, third effect unit 600, and fourth effect unit 800 described in feature 75SG arranged around image display device 5 become less noticeable, making it possible to display the above effects favorably.

Specifically, for example, as described in Figures 9-9 to 9-11, when a normal drawing performance NOR is executed during a period other than the performance execution period D0 among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, it is possible to execute a light-emitting performance using a first light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs. When a specific drawing performance SPE is executed during the performance execution period D2, etc., and control is performed so that a light-emitting performance using a second light-emitting member provided around the electronic components (e.g., LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) and specific components (e.g., base members 301, 401, 601, 801) (e.g., closer than the game effect lamp 9, etc.) may also be controlled not to be executed (or the light amount may be lower than that of the game effect lamp 9, etc.). In this way, it is possible to prevent the electronic components and specific components from being conspicuous by executing a light-emitting performance using the second light-emitting member when the light-emitting performance using the first light-emitting member is restricted.

Furthermore, for light-emitting elements that are not noticeable even when they continue to emit light, such as the second performance LED 404A that can emit surface light from the decorative part 420 of the translucent material that is placed on the front side of the electronic component and specific component, among the second light-emitting elements provided around the electronic component and specific component, the amount of light may be maintained (execution is not restricted) even when control is performed so that the light-emitting effect using the first light-emitting element is not executed. In this way, the electronic component and specific component can be made to be less noticeable without reducing the performance effect too much.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1,75SG001 is given as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called sealed game machines in which a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed inside the game machine so that they can be circulated, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. In these sealed game machines, scores or points are awarded to the player rather than game balls, and these awarded scores or points correspond to the game value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was applied as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general game machine.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications equivalent to and within the scope of the claims.

Other examples of the gaming machine of the present invention include a gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result, and includes electronic components (e.g., LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) that are arranged so as to be visible to the player, and specific members (e.g., base members 303, 403, 603, 803) that are arranged around the electronic components and are formed in a similar color to the electronic components. a light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a member having translucency and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member; a launching means that can launch a game medium into a game area in response to an operation by a player; and a game device that uses an image display to display a game medium being launched toward the second flow-down path out of a first flow-down path and a second flow-down path through which the game medium can flow in the game area. and a guidance display means for displaying guidance to prompt the player, the translucent member (e.g., cover member 302) having a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) formed to straddle the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301) (see FIG. 10-12), the guidance includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display, the guidance display means displays the second guidance display before the name display of the advantageous state, which is part of the start performance that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, is completed during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, displays the first guidance display and continues the second guidance display after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, and ends the first guidance display while continuing the second guidance display during a period after the predetermined period, and continues the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed.

With this configuration, even if electronic components are placed so that they are visible to the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic components less noticeable, allowing for greater freedom in design. Also, instructions that prompt the player to launch the game ball in a specific direction can be executed in an optimal manner.

In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that looks good while increasing the degree of freedom in design, and by emphasizing the instruction to launch the gaming ball in a specified direction with the first and second guidance displays for a specified period of time after the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, and then instructing to launch the gaming ball in the specified direction by taking over the second guidance display without taking over the first guidance display, it is possible to avoid annoyance by not emphasizing the instructions too much, and furthermore, it is possible to first display the second guidance display to discreetly instruct the player to launch the gaming ball in the specified direction, and then to make the player recognize the name of the advantageous state, and after that to clearly instruct the player to launch the gaming ball in the specified direction with the first guidance display. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that looks good when installed in an amusement facility and has easy-to-understand instructions on the direction in which the gaming ball should be launched in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can increase the degree of freedom in design and can suitably execute instructions that encourage the player to launch a gaming ball in a specified direction, there is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result, and is equipped with a launching means that can launch a gaming medium into a gaming area in response to the operation of the player, and a guidance display means that uses an image display to display guidance that encourages the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second flow-down path out of a first flow-down path and a second flow-down path along which the gaming medium can flow in the gaming area, and the guidance display The indication includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display, and the guidance display means, during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, displays the second guidance display before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is part of the start effect that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, is completed, displays the first guidance display and continues the second guidance display after the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, and during a period after the predetermined period, ends the first guidance display while continuing the second guidance display, and continues the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed. An example of an example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another example of the form.

Figure 11 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacka) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacka) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

[Board configuration]
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 12. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a firing control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also equipped with the machine. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

[Operation]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 13 is a flow chart showing an example of the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). Then, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include setting a stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and settings to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S903). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it is determined in step S903 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S903, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S903; Yes), recovery processing (step S904) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S905). The recovery processing in step S904 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S903; No), an initialization process (step S906) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S907) is executed. The initialization process in step S906 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S903, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S905, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

If the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S907, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S906 and the setting change process of step S907 are executed, so that the setting can be changed, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S904 and the setting confirmation process of step S905 are executed, so that the setting can be confirmed. When the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or if the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S906 is executed but the setting is not changed, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S904 is executed but the setting is not confirmed.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms) (step S909), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9010). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute timer interrupt process periodically.

After executing this game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 14 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 14 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 14 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the hit judgment value range from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the hit judgment value range from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the display result determination table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit determination values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit determination values are set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination values regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination values from overlapping with the range of big hit determination values that changes depending on each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game characteristics are such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of ... On the other hand, the game may be of a type in which the rate at which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch during a jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V-type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a jackpot is 1/320 and the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the game may be of a type in which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called one-type two-type mixed type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game is the same, but a setting may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot is higher than when the set value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the game is changed depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a presentation switch (a switch for executing a predetermined presentation each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a special bonus state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

<Explanation of characteristic part 075F>
Next, the gaming machine according to the characteristic feature 075F of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 15-1 to 15-60.

[Configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F]
A front view of a pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F of this embodiment. As shown in Fig. 15-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F, a special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in Fig. 1. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Fig. 15-4), and forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a normal large winning opening) that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A has a large prize opening door in the space between the game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and this large prize opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front sides of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the path for the game ball to the normal large prize opening. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large prize opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1, closing the normal large prize opening, and the game ball cannot enter (pass) through the normal large prize opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the large prize opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the normal large prize opening, and making it easier for the game ball to enter the normal large prize opening.

When a gaming ball enters the regular large prize opening, it is detected by the count switch 23 as it passes through an area provided inside the regular large prize opening. When a gaming ball is detected by the count switch 23, a number of gaming balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches an upper limit (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the regular large prize opening is controlled to a closed state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V-variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V-variable winning ball device 075F007B has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 075F083 (see Figure 15-4), and forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a V-large winning opening) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B has a large winning port door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this large winning port door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the path for the game ball to the V large winning port. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the off state, the large winning port door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1, closing the V large winning port and preventing the game ball from entering (passing through) the V large winning port. On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the on state, the large winning port door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the V large winning port and allowing the game ball to enter the V large winning port more easily.

The game ball that enters the V large prize opening is detected by the V prize opening switch 075F024 (see FIG. 15-4) as it passes through a specific area (also called the V prize opening area) provided inside the V large prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the V prize opening switch 075F024, the game state is controlled to a high probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V prize occurs on the condition that the game ball enters the V large prize opening during a round of the high probability game state, and the game state is controlled to a high probability state. The normal large prize opening and the V large prize opening are collectively referred to as the large prize opening. The large prize opening is also referred to as an attacca.

The pachinko game machine 1 has a number of lamps on the game board 2. Specifically, in addition to the movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and the attacca lamp 9c provided near the normal large prize opening and the V large prize opening, the pachinko game machine 1 also has an attacca upper lamp 075F009U provided above the attacca, a lower left lamp 075F009D provided at the lower left of the game board 2, a board right lamp 075F009F provided to the right of the image display device 5, and a board left lamp 075F009E provided to the left of the image display device 5.

The movable body lamp 9d illuminates the characters (for example, the title of the pachinko game machine 1, in this example, "XXX") attached to the movable body 32 by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED when the movable body 32 is stopped or in operation. The attacca lamp 9c illuminates the vicinity of the attacca by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The attacca upper lamp 075F009U illuminates the vicinity above the attacca by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D illuminates the vicinity of the lower left of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The board right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided on a housing imitating a character, and illuminates the housing imitating a character on the right side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The board left lamp 075F009E illuminates the vicinity of the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The left board lamp 075F009E may be provided on a character-shaped housing, similar to the right board lamp 075F009F. The right board lamp 075F009F and the left board lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (left/right, up/down, etc.), similar to the movable body lamp 9d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has multiple lamps in the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has frame lamps consisting of a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3.

Here, FIG. 15-2 is an explanatory diagram showing the frame lamps. The frame left lamp 075F009L has a group of eleven lamps, the first lamp to the eleventh lamp, arranged counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 075F009L lights up the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of the multiple lamps (11 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has a group of eleven lamps, the first lamp to the eleventh lamp, arranged clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 075F009R lights up the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of the multiple lamps (11 lamps in this example).

The pachinko game machine 1 also has a special symbol LED board 075F020 at the bottom left of the game board 2. The special symbol LED board 075F020 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and is a board that plays the roles of the first reserve indicator 25A, the second reserve indicator 25B, the regular reserve indicator 25C, the regular pattern indicator 20, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 1 by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs. The pachinko game machine 1 also has a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the bottom left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120, and notifies the changes in the special symbol, the number of reserved symbols, the right-hit display, and the like by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs.

Here, Figure 15-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the fourth pattern unit 075F050. As shown in FIG. 15-3(a), the special chart LED board 075F020 includes a special chart 1 variable display unit 075F021 which indicates the variable display of the first special chart, a special chart 2 variable display unit 075F022 which indicates the variable display of the second special chart, a special chart 1 memory display unit 075F023 which indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special chart game, a special chart 2 memory display unit 075F024 which indicates the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special chart game, a regular chart memory display unit 075F025 which indicates the regular chart reserved memory number, a regular chart display unit 075F026 which indicates the variable display of regular charts, a right hit display unit 075F030 which encourages the player to hit to the right, a special rate display unit 075F028 which indicates the presence or absence of a special rate state, a time-saving display unit 075F029 which indicates the presence or absence of a time-saving state, and a round display unit 075F027 which indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot. Each display unit can inform the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special or normal symbols, the results, the current game status, the number of reserved symbols, etc., by lighting or blinking with a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 075F021 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 075F022 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means.

Furthermore, the special chart LED board 075F020 can prompt the player to hit to the right by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 075F030. In this embodiment, when the player is prompted to hit to the right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 075F030 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to hit to the right, that is, when the player is prompted to hit to the left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 075F030 turns off. After the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right hit display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns on the right hit display unit 075F030, and after the pattern is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, it transmits a right hit display turning off designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right hit display unit 075F030. In addition, if the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right-hit display unit 075F030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right-hit display unit 075F030.

Here, right-hand hit refers to operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the second flow-down path, which is one of the first and second flow-down paths through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. The first flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the left area of the game area, and beyond which there is a first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, but there is no second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. The second flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the right area of the game area, and beyond which there are a second start winning hole and a large winning hole (normal large winning hole, V large winning hole) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows toward the first start winning hole through the first flow-down path. When the player shoots the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball flows through the second flow path toward the second start winning hole or the large winning hole (normal large winning hole, V large winning hole). In this embodiment, in the big win game after the big win occurs and in the game state after the big win game (time-saving state or probability change state), the player hits the right to make the game ball enter the second start winning hole or the large winning hole provided on the right side of the game area, and during that time, the right hit display unit 075F030 urges the player to hit the right. By hitting the right while the display urging the player to hit the right is being displayed, the player can make the game ball enter the second start winning hole and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3 balls) are paid out and the right to the second special game can be obtained, or the game ball can enter the normal large winning hole and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out. Furthermore, as will be described in more detail later, during a round of a guaranteed jackpot, the V-large winning hole opens, and by hitting the right while a display is being displayed encouraging the player to hit to the right, the player can gain the right to enter the game ball into the V-large winning hole and be controlled into a guaranteed jackpot state. Therefore, hitting to the right while a display is being displayed encouraging the player to hit to the right can give the player an overall advantage. Note that, unlike hitting to the right, operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the first flow path (hitting style) is also called hitting to the left.

As shown in FIG. 15-3(b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 includes a special symbol 1 memory display section 075F051 that indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display section 075F052 that indicates the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a special symbol 1 variable display section 075F053 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display section 075F054 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a right hit display section 075F055 that encourages the player to hit right. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of a special symbol, the reserved number, and a right hit instruction by lighting/blinking/going out using lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special chart 1 variable display unit 075F053 notifies the player whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopped symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by turning on/flashing/going off a lighting means such as an LED. The special chart 2 variable display unit 075F054 notifies the player whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopped symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by turning on/flashing/going off a lighting means such as an LED. Hereinafter, the display of the change in the stopped symbol of the first special symbol by a lighting means such as an LED in the special chart 1 variable display unit 075F021 is also referred to as the change display of the first special symbol. Also, the display of the change in the stopped symbol of the second special symbol by a lighting means such as an LED in the special chart 2 variable display unit 075F054 is also referred to as the change display of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the player is prompted to hit to the right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to hit to the right, that is, when the player is prompted to hit to the left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display section 075F055 turns off. The performance control CPU 120 turns on the right hit display section 075F055 based on receiving a right hit display lighting command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined, and turns off the right hit display section 075F055 based on receiving a right hit display turning off command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. In addition, if the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right-hit display unit 075F055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right-hit display unit 075F055 based on receiving a jackpot end command from the CPU 103.

Figure 15-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in Figure 15-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, and frame left lamp 075F009L is connected to a lamp control board 14 and can be lit (blinked) by control of the performance control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. Each of these movable body lamps 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, and frame left lamp 075F009L, or these lamps collectively, are also referred to as game effect lamps 9.

The fourth pattern unit 075F050 is connected to the performance control board 12, and each display section can be lit (blinked) under the control of the control CPU 120.

The special chart LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display can be lit (blinked) by the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
15-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 constitutes a second display area 075F005Sa including a first reserved memory display area 075F005D capable of displaying the first reserved memory number by the number of circular reserved displays, and a second reserved memory display area 075F005U capable of displaying the second reserved memory number by the number of circular reserved displays.

The upper right corner of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 075F005Sb that includes a fourth pattern 075F005J, which indicates that a special pattern is being variably displayed, and a display of the first and second reserved memory counts.

In the center of the first display area 075F005F, the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged, and variable display of the decorative patterns can be performed. In addition, small patterns 075F005M, which are smaller than the decorative patterns, are displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small patterns correspond to the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and are arranged vertically. In addition, the small patterns 075F005M are not hidden during variable display, and are always displayed in the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 15-5, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 075F005M is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern at the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. For this reason, the visibility of the small pattern 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 075F005A is provided at the bottom center of the first display area 075F005F for displaying the pending display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as the active display.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Big Win Type)
Fig. 15-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a winning type table. As shown in Fig. 15-6, the winning type table shows the winning probability after the end of the winning game state, the base after the end of the winning game state, the fluctuation time after the end of the winning game state, and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the winning game for each type of winning in the winning game.

Specifically, the types of jackpots are 5R normal jackpot, 5R sure-win jackpot, and 10R sure-win jackpot. In the following, each round may be indicated by "R". For example, the first round is also called the 1st round, and the second round is also called the 2nd round. A 5R normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker makes it difficult to win a V (for example, control that shortens the time to open the lid that opens and closes the V big winning port to a specified time or control that does not allow the game ball to enter a specific area by repeatedly opening and closing the lid), and is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In a normal jackpot, this low probability high base state continues until the earlier of the condition that the variable display is executed a specified number of times, 100 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs is met.

A 5R guaranteed jackpot is a jackpot in which the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) inside the attacker is one that makes it easier to win a V (for example, a control that always keeps the lid that opens and closes the V winning port open, or a control that keeps the lid open for longer than a specific time), and which is controlled to a high probability state and high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In a guaranteed jackpot, this high probability, high base state continues until the earlier of the following conditions is met: the variable display is executed a specified number of times, 150 times, or the next jackpot occurs.

A 10R guaranteed jackpot is a jackpot in which the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is one that makes it easier to win a V (for example, a control that keeps the lid that opens and closes the V winning port always open, or a control that keeps the lid open for longer than a specific time), and which is controlled to a high probability state and high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In a guaranteed jackpot, this high probability, high base state continues until the earlier of the following conditions is met: the variable display is executed a specified number of times, 150 times, or the next jackpot occurs.

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable probability jackpot share the same decorative symbols that stop when the jackpot occurs. In addition, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable probability jackpot share the same presentation style of the fanfare presentation (e.g., background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.) that occurs when the jackpot occurs, the presentation style of the round presentation (e.g., background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.) that occurs during the round of the jackpot game state, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game state are also common. For this reason, it is difficult for a player to recognize whether a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R variable probability jackpot has occurred, as long as they look at the stopped decorative symbols, fanfare presentation, and round presentation. Here, in the case of a 5R variable probability jackpot, the V large prize entry port opens in a specified round (in this embodiment, the 4th round). At this time, if the player can aim at the V-large winning hole and hit the ball to the right to get it into the V-large winning hole, the game state will be controlled to a special state.

As such, 5R normal jackpots and 5R special jackpots are also called chance bonuses because it is difficult for the player to know whether or not a special jackpot has occurred until halfway through the round.

In the case of a 10R special jackpot, the V-large winning hole will open in a specified round (the 9th round in this embodiment) in the same way as in the case of a 5R special jackpot. At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-large winning hole by hitting it to the right, the game state will be controlled to a special jackpot state. However, in the case of a 10R special jackpot, the decorative pattern that stops when the jackpot occurs, the presentation style of the fanfare presentation (for example, the background, the characters that appear, the sound effects, etc.), and the presentation style of the round presentation that is performed during the round of the jackpot game state are different from those of a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R special jackpot. Therefore, when a 10R special jackpot occurs, the player can recognize that a special jackpot has occurred. Such a 10R special jackpot is also called a special bonus.

(each random number)
FIG. 15-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in FIG. 15-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random R is a random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not a hit is made. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, and is updated by adding from 0 to its upper limit of 65535, and then is updated by adding from 0 again. Random 1 is a random counter (for determining the type of hit) that determines the type of hit as 5R normal hit, 5R variable hit, or 10R variable hit. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of fluctuation pattern) that determines the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for determining the fluctuation pattern) that determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for determining the hit of a normal pattern) that determines whether or not a hit based on a normal pattern is generated. Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the initial value of Random 4) that determines the initial value of Random 4.

In this embodiment, whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot determination (Random R). Then, which of the multiple types of jackpots, such as a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R special jackpot, and a 10R special jackpot, that will be the jackpot game state is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot type determination (Random 1). At this time, the jackpot pattern can also be determined based on the value of Random 1.

Furthermore, first, a fluctuation pattern type is determined using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type (Random 3), and then one of the fluctuation patterns included in the determined fluctuation pattern type is determined using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 4). Thus, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. A fluctuation pattern type is a grouping of multiple fluctuation patterns according to the characteristics of their fluctuation modes. One or multiple fluctuation patterns belong to a fluctuation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is classified into a normal reach fluctuation pattern type accompanied by a normal reach, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type accompanied by a super reach. Such fluctuation pattern types are selected at a predetermined rate. In addition, in the case of a miss, the fluctuation pattern types are classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type that does not involve a reach, a normal reach fluctuation pattern type, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type.

These types of fluctuation pattern are set so that when the display result is incorrect, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern type differs between when the time-saving state is in effect and when the time-saving state is not in effect (when the time-saving state is in effect, the rate at which a fluctuation pattern type with a short fluctuation display time, such as a normal fluctuation pattern type, is selected is set to be higher than when the time-saving state is not in effect), and therefore when the time-saving state is in effect, the fluctuation display time is shorter than when the time-saving state is not in effect.

In addition, such a variation pattern type may be set so that the selection ratio differs when the reserved memory number of each special symbol that performs the variable display is equal to or greater than a predetermined number and when it is less than the predetermined number, so that when the reserved memory number of each special symbol that performs the variable display is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the reserved number shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time compared to when the reserved number shortening control number is less than the predetermined number. For example, in the reserved number shortening control state, the ratio of selecting a variation pattern type with a short variable display time such as a normal variable pattern type may be set to be higher compared to when the reserved number shortening control state is not in effect, so that the average variable display time is shorter compared to when the reserved number shortening control state is not in effect. In addition, in the reserved number shortening control, the variable display time of the variation pattern type itself may be shortened even when the same variable pattern type is selected compared to when the reserved number shortening control state is not in effect.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern may be determined in a one-step method in which the fluctuation pattern is determined by a single random number drawing, rather than in a two-step method in which the fluctuation pattern type is determined first and then the fluctuation pattern is determined.

(Big hit determination table, big hit type determination table)
15-8 is an explanatory diagram showing the big win determination table and the big win type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

Figure 15-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in RO101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value that is compared with random R is set. There are two types of jackpot determination tables: a normal (non-high probability) jackpot determination table used in the normal state (a gaming state that is not in the high probability state, i.e., a non-high probability state), and a high probability jackpot determination table used in the high probability state.

The normal jackpot determination table has the numerical values in the left column of FIG. 15-8 (A) set as jackpot determination values, and the special jackpot determination table has the numerical values in the right column of FIG. 15-8 (B) set as jackpot determination values. The special jackpot determination table has a larger number of jackpot determination values (called special jackpot determination values or second jackpot determination values) than the special jackpot determination table, by adding a special jackpot determination value specific to the special jackpot determination table to the jackpot determination values common to the normal jackpot determination table (called normal jackpot determination values or first jackpot determination values). This allows a special jackpot determination to occur with a higher probability than the normal state.

At a predetermined time, the CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and compares the extracted value with the value of a random number (random R) for determining a jackpot. If the random number value for determining a jackpot matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 15-8 (A), it decides to determine a jackpot for the special symbol (either a normal jackpot or a special jackpot). Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 15-8 (A) indicates the probability (percentage) of a jackpot.

Figures 15-8 (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. Figure 15-8 (B) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the first special pattern. Figure 15-8 (C) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the second special pattern.

The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 15-8(B) has a value to be compared with the value of Random 1 for jackpot type determination, and the jackpot determination values corresponding to "5R normal jackpot", "5R special jackpot", and "10R special jackpot" are set. The second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 15-8(C) has a value to be compared with the value of Random 1, and the jackpot determination value corresponding to "10R special jackpot".

As shown in Fig. 15-8 (B) and (C), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) that determines the jackpot patterns of the first special pattern and the second special pattern. For example, the judgment value corresponding to a "5R normal jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "1". The judgment value corresponding to a "5R sure-win jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "3". The judgment value corresponding to a "10R sure-win jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "7". The special pattern 1 variable display unit 075F021 and the special pattern 2 variable display unit 075F022 in the special pattern LED board 075F020 can indicate the stopped jackpot pattern by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as LEDs in a lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot pattern. Similarly, the special pattern 1 variable display unit 075F053 and the special pattern 2 variable display unit 075F054 in the fourth pattern unit 075F050 can indicate the stopped jackpot pattern by lighting or blinking lighting means such as LEDs in a lighting pattern corresponding to each jackpot pattern.

Using these various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines the jackpot pattern with which the value of Random 1 matches, as the jackpot pattern. This simultaneously determines the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern that corresponds to the jackpot type.

According to these various jackpot type determination tables, for jackpots with the second special symbol, the percentage of "10R sure jackpot" selected is higher than for jackpot types selectable with the first special symbol, and the percentage of jackpot types that are advantageous to the player selected is higher.

(Performance control command)
FIG. 15-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a presentation control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various presentation control commands to the presentation control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The presentation control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 15-9 is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Note that, although "(H)" indicates hexadecimal in the following description, it may be omitted in this specification.

Command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. When the performance control CPU 101 receives command 8001 (H) or command 8002 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Command 81XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of the special pattern (each corresponds to a variation pattern XX). In other words, when a unique number is assigned to each of multiple types of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command that corresponds to each variation pattern identified by that number.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (miss designation command) indicating that a miss has been determined. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R normal jackpot has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R special jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R special jackpot has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R special jackpot designation command) indicating that a 10R special jackpot has been determined. The miss designation command, 5R normal jackpot designation command, 5R special jackpot designation command, and 10R special jackpot designation command, or all of these collectively, are also referred to as 8C commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first pattern change designation command that indicates the start of the changing display of the first special pattern. Command 8D02 (H) is a second pattern change designation command that indicates the start of the changing display of the second special pattern. The first pattern change designation command and the second pattern change designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a pattern confirmation designation command that specifies the end of the changing of the first special pattern and/or the second special pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization command that specifies initialization (specifies that the initial screen at power-on is displayed) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery command that specifies power outage recovery (specifies that the power outage recovery screen is displayed) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state command that specifies the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state command that specifies the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a special probability state command that specifies the background of the special probability state. Each of the normal state command, time-saving state command, and special probability state command, or these are collectively referred to as a 95 series command or background command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demonstration command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of a 5R normal jackpot. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of a 5R special jackpot. Command A003 (H) is a special jackpot start 3 designation command that designates the start of a 10R special jackpot. The jackpot start 1 designation command, jackpot start 2 designation command, and jackpot start 3 designation command, or all of these collectively, are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying when the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A1 series command. A2XX (H) is a command for specifying after the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is closed for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying after the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of a 5R normal jackpot. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of a 5R special jackpot. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of a 10R special jackpot. The jackpot end 1 designation command, jackpot end 2 designation command, and jackpot end 3 designation command, or all of these collectively, are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command that specifies that a V win has occurred. The high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V large winning port enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

Command B100(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command B200(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved memory number designation command that designates that the first reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second reserved memory designation command that designates that the second reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C2 series command.

Commands C4XX(H) and C6XX(H) are presentation control commands that indicate the contents of the winning judgment results, such as a jackpot judgment, a jackpot type judgment, and a fluctuation pattern type judgment, when a start winning is made at the first or second start winning port. Of these, command C4XX(H) is a design designation command that indicates whether or not a winning has occurred, and the type of jackpot judgment result, among the winning judgment results. In addition, command C3XX(H) is a fluctuation type command that indicates the judgment result of which range of judgment values the value of the fluctuation pattern type judgment random number falls within, among the winning judgment results (fluctuation pattern type judgment result).

C7XX(H) is a special prize opening entry designation command that indicates the passage of the game ball through the special prize opening on the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-hit display off command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned off. A command in which MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT data is 1 is a right-hit display on command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned on. In this embodiment, the right-hit display on command is also referred to as an FD command.

At the time of start winning, the game control microcomputer 100 judges whether or not a jackpot will be generated, the type of jackpot, and the value of the random number for judging the type of fluctuation pattern, which range of judgment values it falls within. Then, it sets a value specifying a jackpot and a value specifying the type of jackpot in the EXT data of the designation command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The game control microcomputer 100 also sets a value specifying the range of judgment values as the judgment result of the type of fluctuation pattern in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the designation command, and can recognize the type of fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type command.

[Operation]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F will be described. First, the process by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 15-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal special symbol processing. As shown in FIG. 15-10, in the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 judges whether there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the second special symbol) (step 075FS001). If there is no reserved memory data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (N in step 075FS001), it judges whether a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (step 075FS002). If the predetermined period has not passed since the fluctuation stop (N in step 075FS002), the normal special symbol processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y in step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is sent, a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set, which indicates that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent. Then, when the special symbol normal processing is executed after the next timer interruption after the customer waiting demo designation command is sent, the customer waiting demo designation command is controlled not to be sent again based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. Such a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is reset when the next variable display of the special symbol is started.

When there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 judges whether the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (step 075FS004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating "second" (i.e., data indicating "first") (N in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) (step 075FS005). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006).

In this embodiment, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern and the display of the second special pattern are performed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the second special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer.

By the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the display of the second special symbol changes based on the data in the second reserved memory is executed in priority over the display of the first special symbol changes based on the data in the first reserved memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 indicated by the special pattern pointer based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer after subtraction (step 075FS009). In this case, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first reserved memory number designation command. Also, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 sends a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads Random R (random number for determining a jackpot) from the reserved memory buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for determining a jackpot that was extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see Figure 15-8) with the random number for determining a jackpot, and determines that a jackpot has occurred if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes the process of determining a jackpot.

In the process of determining a jackpot, when the game state is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the game state is not in a probability variable state (normal game state and time-saving state). Specifically, a probability variable jackpot determination table (table with the values on the right side of FIG. 15-8(A) set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and a normal time jackpot determination table (table with the values on the left side of FIG. 15-8(A) set) in which a smaller number of jackpot determination values are set than in the probability variable jackpot determination table are provided. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the game state is in a probability variable state, and when the game state is in a probability variable state, performs the process of determining a jackpot using the probability variable jackpot determination table, and when the game state is in a normal state or time-saving state, performs the process of determining a jackpot using the normal time jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for determining a jackpot (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 15-8 (A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it determines that a jackpot has occurred (Y in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS012. Note that determining whether or not to determine whether or not to determine a jackpot means determining whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, but also means determining whether or not to determine whether or not the stopped symbol in the special symbol is a jackpot symbol.

Whether the current game state is in a high probability state is confirmed by checking whether the high probability state flag is set. The high probability state flag is set when the game state transitions to a high probability state, and is reset when the high probability state ends. Specifically, the high probability state flag is set in the process of ending a jackpot game, and is then reset at the timing when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stopped pattern is displayed stationary when either the variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times (150 times) or the next jackpot has been determined, whichever occurs first, is met.

If the value of the random number (Random R) for determining a jackpot does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step 075FS011), proceed to step 075FS016, which will be described later.

If the value of the random number (random R) for determining a jackpot matches any of the jackpot determination values in step 075FS011, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 075FS012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table to be used to determine the jackpot type as one of the multiple types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 15-8 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 15-8 (C) are selected (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-8 (B). Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 15-8 (C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for determining the type of jackpot extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and using the jackpot type determination table selected in step 075FS013, determines the jackpot type and jackpot pattern that correspond to the value that matches the value of the random number for determining the type of jackpot (Random 1) stored in the reserved memory buffer (step 075FS014).

As shown in Figures 15-8 (B) and (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern is set so that the jackpot pattern differs for each jackpot type, and the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern are determined simultaneously, so that the correspondence between the jackpot pattern and the game control according to the jackpot type is simplified, preventing the game control from becoming complicated.

The CPU 103 also sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, if the jackpot type is a "5R normal jackpot", the jackpot type data is set to "01". If the jackpot type is a "5R variable jackpot", the jackpot type data is set to "02". If the jackpot type is a "10R variable jackpot", the jackpot type data is set to "03".

Next, the CPU 103 sets the stopping symbol for the special symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, the "-" symbol, which is a losing symbol, is set as the stopping symbol for the special symbol. If the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stopping symbol for the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be a "5R normal jackpot", the stopping symbol for the special symbol is set to "1". When the jackpot type is determined to be a "5R special jackpot", the stopping symbol for the special symbol is set to "3". When the jackpot type is determined to be a "10R special jackpot", the stopping symbol for the special symbol is set to "7".

Then, the CPU 103 sends a display result designation command (step 075FS017) and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 15-11 is a flow chart showing an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 15-11, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a fluctuation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table according to the jackpot type, and when the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 selects a miss fluctuation pattern type determination table. Then, the CPU 103 reads out random 2 (random number for fluctuation pattern type determination) from the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the fluctuation pattern type to one of a plurality of types by referring to the selected table.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to send a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the change time corresponding to the selected change pattern in the change time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send a pattern change designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern change process (S112) (step 075FS105).

(Special pattern variation processing)
Fig. 15-12 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variation process. As shown in Fig. 15-11, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step 075FS202), updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (S113) (step 075FS203). When the variation time timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS202), the process ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 15-13 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 15-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets an end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and performs control to derive and display the stop symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 075F021 or the special symbol 2 variable display unit 075F022 (step 075FS301). If data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 075F021 is ended, and if data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the second special symbol in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 075F022 is ended. In addition, a symbol determination designation command is set in the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, the symbol determination designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 judges whether or not the big win flag is set (step 075FS303). If the big win flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the process proceeds to step 075FS309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the probability bonus flag and the time-saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, it transmits a jackpot start command and a right-hit display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

Also, referring to the opening pattern data stored in RO101, data indicating the opening mode of the normal large prize winning port and the V large prize winning port, such as the number of times of opening (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval time between rounds (for example, 0.5 seconds), are set in a predetermined memory area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal large prize winning port in all 1R to 5R, etc., is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM102. In the case of a 5R sure-change jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal large prize winning port in the 1st to 3rd Rs and the 5th Rs, and the V large prize winning port in the 4th Rs, etc., is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM102. In addition, in the case of a 10R sure-change jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal large prize winning port in the 1st to 8th Rs and the 10th Rs, and the V large prize winning port in the 9th Rs, etc., is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM102. The data on the number of times it was opened (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening counter to count the number of times it was opened.

The large prize opening control timer is also set to a value equivalent to the fanfare time, which is the jackpot display time (the time during which the occurrence of a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 075FS307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the large prize opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the large prize opening is opened and the round begins. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step 075FS303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time-saving flag indicating the time-saving state is set (step 075FS309). If the time-saving flag is not set (N in step 075FS309), the process proceeds to step 075FS316. If the time-saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time-saving count counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time-saving state is decremented by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). If the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time-saving state has ended, and the time-saving flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, when the variable display that results in a miss display occurs a specific number of times (150 times) in the time-saving state, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. In step 075FS311, if the value of the time-saving counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS311), the process transitions to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether or not the probability variable flag indicating the probability variable state is set (step 075FS313). If the probability variable flag is set (Y in step 075FS313), the probability variable flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step 075FS315) and proceeds to step 075FS316. If the probability variable flag is not set in step 075FS313 (N in step 075FS313), the process of step 075FS314 is not performed and the process proceeds to step 075FS315. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS316), and the process ends.

(Pre-opening process for big win)
Fig. 15-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening pre-processing. As shown in Fig. 15-14, in the big win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big win opening control timer by 1 (subtract update) (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big win opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the big win opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS402), the process is terminated.

If the value of the large prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS402), a command to specify that the large prize opening is open is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the regular large prize opening (step 075FS404). As a result, the regular large prize opening is opened in the first round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the large prize opening control timer to a large prize opening opening time (29 seconds) corresponding to the maximum time that the large prize opening can be opened (large prize opening opening time) based on the opening pattern data (for example, data stored in the RAM 102 by step 075FS306) (step 075FS405). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the large prize opening processing (S115) (step 075FS406), and ends the processing.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
15-15 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening process. As shown in FIG. 15-15, in the big win opening process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big win opening control timer by 1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (step 075FS502). If the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (Y in step 075FS501), the process proceeds to step 075FS511. If the value of the large prize opening control timer has not reached 0 (N in step 075FS502), the process determines whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (step 075FS503). Whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open can be determined from the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step 075FS503 that the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is not open (N in step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (Y in step 075FS503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 075F024 is on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V prize switch 075F024 is on (N in step 075FS504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 075F024 is on (Y in step 075FS504), the prize number counter is incremented by +1 (updated) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether the high probability variable flag is set (step 075FS506). The high probability variable flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the machine will be controlled into the high probability variable state when a V win occurs. If the high probability variable flag is set (Y in step 075FS506), processing proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the high probability variable flag is not set (N in step 075FS506), it is determined whether the V win switch 075F024 is on (step 075FS507). If the V win switch 075F024 is not on (N in step 075FS507), processing proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (Y in step 075FS507), the probability change determination flag is set (step 075FS508), a probability change determination device pass command is sent (step 075FS509), and processing proceeds to step 075FS510.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning number counter has not reached the predetermined number (N in step 075FS510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 performs either control to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large prize opening, or control to drive the solenoid 075F083 to close the V large prize opening (step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the post-large prize opening process (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the process.

(Post-opening processing)
15-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win release post-processing. As shown in FIG. 15-16, in the big win release post-processing, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the release number counter is 0 or not (step 075FS601).

If the value of the opening count counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), a jackpot end command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), a value corresponding to the jackpot end time (the time at which the jackpot game is notified, for example, on the image display device 5 that the jackpot game has ended) is set in the jackpot entry port control timer (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process ends.

In step 075FS601, if the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS601), a command to specify when the large prize opening is to be opened is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS605), and the large prize opening control timer is set to a value equivalent to the interval time from the end of a round to the start of the next round (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is before the round in which the V large prize opening is opened (also called the V opening round), i.e., whether or not the next round is a V opening round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal large prize opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 075F083 to open the V large prize opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 sends a command to the performance control CPU 120 to specify whether the big win opening is in progress (step 075FS610). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big win opening processing (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the processing.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 15-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot end process. As shown in FIG. 15-17, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the large prize opening control timer in which the jackpot end time is set (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the large prize opening control timer is 0 (whether the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the large prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS702), the process ends. If the value of the large prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the jackpot flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the high probability flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step 075FS704). If the high probability flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), the process proceeds to step 075FS705. If the high probability flag is set in step 075FS704 (Y in step 075FS704), the high probability flag indicating that the game is in a high probability state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a high probability state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), the high probability flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process proceeds to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time-saving flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is active (step 075FS710), and the time-saving count counter is set to 150 (step 075FS711). Then, the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, if the probability of a bonus has not been set in step 075FS704 (N in step 075FS704), then in step 075FS705, a time-saving flag is set indicating that the game is in the time-saving state (step 075FS705), the time-saving counter is set to 100 (step 075FS706), and the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time-saving state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 is able to recognize whether the game is in a special, time-saving, or normal state based on the special state designation command sent from the CPU 103.

(Performance processing during big win)
Next, the processing by the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 will be described. FIG. 15-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the performance processing during a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 15-18, in the performance processing during a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, flags such as the jackpot end designation command reception flag are set by the performance control CPU 120 when data indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received is stored in the command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121, and are erased at a predetermined timing such as when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot end command reception flag is not set (N in step 075FS651), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). If the process timer has timed out (Y in step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 075FS656). In addition, the performance device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is controlled according to the content of the next set process data (step 075FS657). For example, the performance control CPU 120 reads image data from ROM 121 according to the content of the process data in order to display an image corresponding to the performance during the round on the image display device 5, and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5. In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control the lighting/flashing/extinguishing of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output sound. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), control of the presentation devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) continues according to the contents of the set process data (step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The performance control CPU 120 sets the above-mentioned process data based on the performance control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, it sets process data corresponding to the fanfare performance in order to execute the fanfare performance under the control of the performance device. Furthermore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a right-hit display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, it lights up the lighting means such as an LED in the right-hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 to encourage the player to hit right.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a command (A1 series command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of each round of a jackpot, it sets process data corresponding to the mid-round performance in order to execute the mid-round performance under the control of the performance device, as follows.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A102 command) to specify when the large prize opening is in progress from the CPU 103 at the start of the second round of a 5R normal jackpot, it sets process data for executing a V-type probability variation indication effect that indicates whether or not the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 5R normal jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify when the jackpot is in progress that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 2R) based on the command (A102 command) to specify when the large prize opening is in progress, and sets process data for executing an indication corresponding to the identified round of the jackpot (in this case, a V-type probability variation indication effect).

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of the second round of a 5R special jackpot, it sets process data for executing a V special jackpot suggestion performance (see FIG. 15-41). At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 5R special jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 2R) based on the command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open, and sets process data for executing a performance corresponding to the identified round of the jackpot (in this case, a V special jackpot suggestion performance).

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A103 command) to specify that the large prize opening is in progress from the CPU 103 at the start of the third round of a five round special jackpot, it sets process data for executing a V notice performance (see FIG. 15-42) that notifies the player that the next fourth round will be a V opening round. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a five round special jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, the third round) based on the command (A103 command) to specify that the large prize opening is in progress, and sets process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V notice performance) that corresponds to the round of the jackpot that has been identified.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A203 command) to specify after the opening of the large prize opening from the CPU 103 after 3R of the 5R special jackpot, it sets process data for executing the "Aim for V" performance (see FIG. 15-43) that aims to make the game ball enter the V large prize opening, which is a specific area, between rounds. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 5R special jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify after the opening of the large prize opening, which has already been received, and specifies the round of the jackpot that has ended (in this case, 3R) based on the command (A203 command) to specify after the opening of the large prize opening, and sets process data for executing the performance (in this case, the "Aim for V" performance) according to the specified post-round during the jackpot. The "Aim for V" performance is a guide display using an image display related to the V large prize opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the Aim for V presentation, an image is displayed that encourages the player to hit to the right to launch the game ball toward the V large prize opening, which is a specific area. In the Aim for V presentation, an image may be displayed that points to the V large prize opening itself, which is a specific area, an image may be displayed that points to the vicinity of the V large prize opening, which is a specific area, or an image may be displayed that points to the path to the V large prize opening, which is a specific area.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives a command (A104 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of the 4th round of a 5R sure-win jackpot, it sets process data for continuing to execute the Aim for V presentation (see FIG. 15-44). At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 5R sure-win jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 4th round) based on the command (A104 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open, and sets process data for executing the presentation corresponding to the identified round of the jackpot (in this case, the Aim for V presentation).

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A108 command) to specify that the large prize opening is in progress from the CPU 103 at the start of the 8th round of a 10R sure-win jackpot, it sets process data for executing a V notice performance that notifies the player that the next 9th round will be a V opening round. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 10R sure-win jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 8th round) based on the command (A108 command) to specify that the large prize opening is in progress, and sets process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V notice performance) that corresponds to the round of the jackpot that has been identified.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives a command (A208 command) specifying the time after the opening of the large prize opening from the CPU 103 after 8R of a 10R sure-win jackpot, it sets process data for executing a "Aim for V" presentation that aims to make the game ball enter the V large prize opening, which is a specific area, between rounds. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 10R sure-win jackpot) based on the already received command specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), specifies the round of the jackpot that has ended (in this case, 8R) based on the command specifying the time after the opening of the large prize opening (A208 command), and sets process data for executing a presentation corresponding to the end of the round during the specified jackpot (in this case, the "Aim for V" presentation).

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A109 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of the 9th round of a 10R special jackpot, it sets process data for continuing to execute the "Aim for V" performance. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 10R special jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 9R) based on the command (A109 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open, and sets process data for executing the performance (in this case, the "Aim for V" performance) according to the round of the jackpot that has been identified.

Furthermore, when the output control CPU 120 receives a command (AD00 command) to specify passage through the probability change determination device from the CPU 103 during a jackpot round, it sets process data corresponding to the V winning presentation in order to execute the V winning presentation by controlling the presentation device as follows.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (AD00 command) to specify passage through the probability change determination device from the CPU 103 during the 4th round of a 5th round probability change jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning performance (see Figure 15-44).

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (AD00) to specify passage through the probability change determination device from the CPU 103 during the 9R of a 10R probability change jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning performance.

In addition, when the presentation control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot gaming state, it sets process data for executing an ending presentation (see Figures 15-46 and 15-47) that indicates the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data based on the performance control commands received from the CPU 103, thereby controlling the performance devices such as the image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9 to execute various performances.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 075F configured as described above, the game proceeds as follows. The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 075F also has the content of the game played in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 already described, but the following will particularly explain the part of the game related to the characteristic part 075F.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits with the left hand to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left area of the game area. When the launched game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started. When the result of the first special game is that the special game 1 variable display unit 075F021 is in a display mode showing a jackpot pattern, a jackpot occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the first special pattern game include a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R special chance jackpot, and a 10R special chance jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-hit promotion effect is executed to encourage the player to make a right hit. The right-hit promotion effect is executed by displaying text (for example, "right hit") and a graphic image (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage a right hit, and also by lighting up the right-hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050, for example, LEDs or other lighting means to encourage a right hit. This causes the player to make a right hit from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot opening opens a predetermined number of times (for example, five times for a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R special jackpot, and ten times for a 10R special jackpot). The jackpot opening continues until a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), whichever comes first.

In the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal large prize entry port opens in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V large prize entry port opens only in the 4th round. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize, there will be no V prize. Also, since there will be no V prize, the Aim for V performance will not be executed in the 4th round, and the same background image as in the 1st round will be displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal large prize entry port opens in the 1st and 2nd rounds, and in the 2nd round, a V special probability suggestion performance is executed, which suggests whether or not there is a special probability jackpot. Then, as a result of the V special probability suggestion performance, it is announced that it is a normal jackpot, not a special probability jackpot. After that, the V large prize entry port opens in the 4th round, but no V prize occurs, and then in the 5th round, the normal large prize entry port opens, and when the 5th round ends, the ending performance is executed.

In the case of a 5R special jackpot, the normal special jackpot is opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V special jackpot is opened only in the 4th round. Specifically, in the case of a 5R special jackpot, the normal special jackpot is opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds, as in the 5R normal jackpot, and in the 2nd round, a V special jackpot suggestion effect is executed, which indicates whether or not it is a special jackpot. Then, as a result of the V special jackpot suggestion effect, it is announced that it is a special jackpot. Then, in the 3rd round after that, a V notice effect is executed, which indicates that the next 4th round is a V opening round. In the 4th round, the V special jackpot is opened, and when the game ball that entered the V special jackpot is detected by the V entry switch 075F024, a V entry occurs. This gives the player the right to control the game state after the jackpot round to a special jackpot state. After that, in the 5th round, the regular big prize slot opens again, and when the 5th round ends, the ending performance is performed.

In the case of a 10R special jackpot, the normal special jackpot is opened in the 1st through 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V special jackpot is opened only in the 9th round. Specifically, in the case of a 10R special jackpot, the normal special jackpot is opened in the 1st through 7th rounds, and in the 7th round, a V special jackpot suggestion effect is executed, which suggests whether or not it is a special jackpot. Then, as a result of the V special jackpot suggestion effect, it is announced that it is a special jackpot. Then, in the 8th round, a V notice effect is executed, which announces that the next 9th round is a V opening round. In the 9th round, the V special jackpot is opened, and when the game ball that entered the V special jackpot is detected by the V entry switch 075F024, a V entry occurs. This gives the player the right to control the game state after the jackpot round to a special jackpot state. After that, in the 10th round, the regular big prize slot opens again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending performance is performed.

When the ending performance after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times for a 5R normal jackpot, 150 times for a 5R special jackpot and a 10R special jackpot). Furthermore, in the case of a 5R special jackpot and a 10R special jackpot, if a V win occurs during the jackpot round, the game state is controlled to the special jackpot state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (150 times) that are controlled to the time-saving state. In other words, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the game state after the jackpot round becomes a low-probability high-base state, and in the case of a 5R special jackpot or a 10R special jackpot, the game state after the jackpot round becomes a high-probability high-base state.

Even in the special probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round, the right-hit promotion effect continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 075F030, and the right-hit display unit 075F055. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also called the first hit) occurs, the player is always prompted to hit right by the right-hit promotion effect, even in the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the time-saving state, control is performed to shorten the average special chart change time (period during which the special chart changes) more than in the normal state, and control is performed to shorten the average regular chart change time (period during which the regular chart changes) more than in the normal state, and further control is performed to increase the probability of a "regular chart hit" in the regular chart game more than in the normal state. Also, in the time-saving state, electric chute support control may be performed to increase the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6B that forms the second start winning port is opened, thereby increasing the frequency at which the game ball enters the second start winning port, making it easier to win in the second start winning port (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time-saving state after the jackpot round, the released game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, starting the second special game. As a result of the second special game, when the special game 2 variable display section 075F022 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot pattern, a jackpot (also called a consecutive win) occurs.

As mentioned above, the type of jackpot in the second special game is the 10R guaranteed jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 075F030, and right-hit display unit 075F055 continues from the first jackpot.

During a round in which a jackpot game is in progress, the jackpot opening opens a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times). Each opening of the jackpot opening continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed or the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10), whichever comes first.

Because it is a 10R sure-win jackpot, the normal big prize opening is open in the 1st through 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V big prize opening is only open in the 9th round. Specifically, like the first win, the normal big prize opening is open in the 1st through 7th rounds. Then, in the 8th round that follows, a V notice performance is executed, notifying the player that the next 9th round will be a V opening round. In the 9th round, the V big prize opening is opened, and when the game ball that entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V entry switch 075F024, a V entry occurs. This grants the player the right to control the game state after the jackpot round to a sure-win state. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, an ending performance is executed.

Then, when the ending presentation after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state and the probability variable state (high probability, high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times) in the same way as the first hit. Even in the probability variable state after the jackpot round in a consecutive hit, the right-hit promotion presentation continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 075F030, and the right-hit display unit 075F055. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, consecutive hits occur in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends, and the player is always encouraged to hit right by the right-hit promotion presentation, even in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends in the consecutive hit.

When the probability variable state or time-saving state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the probability variable state or time-saving state after the first jackpot round ends, or the probability variable state or time-saving state after the consecutive jackpot round ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 075F030, and right-hit display unit 075F055 also ends. This allows the player to hit the ball from the left again to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left area of the game area.

[Timing chart of an example of processing]
With reference to Fig. 15-19 to Fig. 15-21, the timing of the main processing executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 075F will be described. Fig. 15-19 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a winning fluctuation. Fig. 15-20 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. Fig. 15-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the jackpot ends. Fig. 15-19 to Fig. 15-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R variable jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 15-19, at t1, when the first special symbol game starts with the game ball entering the first start winning hole, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a pattern change designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a change pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for changing and displaying decorative symbols in response to the change in the first special symbol, and for executing a change-in-progress performance (for example, a reach performance or a preview performance) in accordance with the change in the first special symbol.

For example, the performance control CPU 120 updates the display of the first reserved memory display area 075F005D and updates the lighting state of the special pattern 1 memory display unit 075F051 by specifying the first reserved memory number based on the reserved memory number specification command. The performance control CPU 120 also controls the image display device 5 to display a background image corresponding to the game state by specifying the game state being controlled based on the background specification command. The performance control CPU 120 also specifies that the special pattern will start to change based on the pattern change specification command, and sets the start timing of the performance. The performance control CPU 120 also specifies the presence or absence of a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the display result specification command, and determines the corresponding decorative pattern. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 also sets the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern (presence or absence of a reach, etc.), and the content of the performance during the variable display of the decorative pattern (type of reach performance, etc.) based on the change pattern specification command.

After that, when the variation of the special symbol stops at t2, the CPU 103 sends a symbol determination command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the symbol determination command.

When a jackpot occurs as a result of the special symbol fluctuation stop, at t3 thereafter, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start command (A0 command) and a right-hit display lighting command (FD command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing a fanfare performance and lights up lighting means such as an LED in the right-hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for displaying an image congratulating the jackpot on the image display device 5 as a fanfare performance, and outputting a sound congratulating the jackpot from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays an image encouraging right-hitting on the image display device 5 as a right-hit promotion performance, and outputs a sound encouraging right-hitting from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 15-20, when the big win round starts at t4, the CPU 103 opens the normal big win opening and sends a big win opening open command (A101 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the first round.

After that, when the first round ends at t5, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A201 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any special performance settings based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

After that, when the second round starts at t6, the CPU 103 opens the normal large prize opening and sends a command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify that the large prize opening is open. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the performance during the round in the second round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing a V probability change suggestion performance (see FIG. 15-41) based on the command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open.

After that, when the second round ends at t7, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any special performance settings based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

After that, when the third round starts at t8, the CPU 103 opens the normal large prize opening and sends a large prize opening open command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the third round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V preview performance (see FIG. 15-42) based on the large prize opening open command (A103 command).

After that, when the third round ends at t9, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A203 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the inter-round performance from after the third round to the fourth round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the Aim for V performance (see FIG. 15-43) based on the command (A203 command) to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

As shown in FIG. 15-21, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 opens the normal large prize opening and sends a command (A104 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify that the large prize opening is open. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the 4th round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V preview performance (see FIG. 15-42) and then the Aim for V performance (see FIG. 15-43) based on the command (A104 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open.

After that, when a V win occurs at t11, the CPU 103 sends a command (AD00 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify passage of the probability change determination device. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V win performance (see FIG. 15-44).

After that, when the 4th round ends at t12, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any special performance settings based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

After that, when the 5th round starts at t13, the CPU 103 opens the normal large prize opening and sends a large prize opening open command (A105 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the 5th round.

After that, when the 5th round ends at t14, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A205 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any special performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end command (A3 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the ending performance.

After that, the game is controlled to a high probability state and a time-saving state (high probability high base state), and in this state, the CPU 103 changes the performance control command depending on whether the number of reserved memories exceeds 0.

For example, at t16, if the number of reserved memories exceeds 0, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a pattern change designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a change pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for changing and displaying the decorative patterns in response to the change in the second special pattern, and for executing a performance during change (for example, a reach performance or a preview performance) in accordance with the change in the second special pattern.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved memories does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 sends a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration performance (see FIG. 15-60) that allows the player to identify that no game is being played. For example, the performance control CPU 120 displays an image of the initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative pattern or small pattern on the image display device 5, or stops the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Note that the customer waiting demonstration performance is not limited to the form shown in FIG. 15-60, and may be any performance that allows the player to identify that no game is being played, such as a character image or the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1.

[Lamp lighting status]
Fig. 15-22 is an explanatory diagram showing the lighting state of the lamps. In this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, right panel lamp 075F009F, left panel lamp 075F009E, right frame lamp 075F009R, left frame lamp 075F009L), the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are shown in a black-painted state as shown in Fig. 15-22 (A) when each of them is turned off.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are shown lit up in a white-painted manner as shown in Figure 15-22 (B).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are each shown as being lit/blinking/off in a manner corresponding to the performance and the background displayed on the image display device 5, in a hatched manner as shown in FIG. 15-22 (C).

[Performance of Pachinko Game Machine 1]
Next, a description will be given of the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game. Figures 15-23 to 15-33 and 15-38 to 15-50 are explanatory diagrams showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game.

As shown in FIG. 15-23(a), when a losing symbol stops due to the variation of the special symbol in the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbol. After that, if there is a first reserved memory number, the CPU 103 transmits a reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a symbol variation designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a variation pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 changes and displays the decorative symbol in response to the variation of the first special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, or executes a variation-in-progress performance (for example, a reach performance or a notice performance) in accordance with the variation of the first special symbol. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each of the performances in Fig. 15-23(b1) to Fig. 15-24(b3) based on the reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command), background designation command (95 series command), pattern change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command). In other words, each of the performances performed between Fig. 15-23(b1) to Fig. 15-24(b3) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-23(b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. Also, as shown in FIG. 15-23(b2), in the event of a jackpot variation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach effect.

After that, when the variation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 sends a symbol determination command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the symbol determination command.

As shown in FIG. 15-24(b3), when a jackpot occurs as a result of the stop of the special symbol fluctuation, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start command (A0 command) and a right-hit display lighting command (FD command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 executes a fanfare performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights up the lighting means such as an LED in the right-hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 15-24(c1) to FIG. 15-38(d2) based on the jackpot start command (A0 command) and the right-hit display lighting command (FD command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 15-24(c1) to FIG. 15-38(d2) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

Now, the fanfare effect will be described in detail. The fanfare effect is divided into multiple effect parts. In this embodiment, the fanfare effect includes a celebration part, a name display part, and a right-hit promotion part. The celebration part is an effect part in which an effect to celebrate a jackpot is executed, and as described later in FIG. 15-24 (c1), an image celebrating the jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound celebrating the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed to a lighting mode celebrating the jackpot. The name display part is a presentation part that informs the player that a jackpot round is about to start by announcing the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred, and also informs the player of the type of the jackpot game state that has occurred. As described later in Fig. 15-24 (c2) and (c3), a name image showing the name of the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting state corresponding to the start of the jackpot. The right hit promotion part is a presentation part that encourages the player to hit right, and as described later in Fig. 15-24 (c4) to Fig. 15-33 (c29), a big right hit promotion presentation is executed that encourages the player to hit right using image displays of letters and figures. After the jackpot symbol stops and the symbol is confirmed, the performance control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation command (8F00) from the CPU 103, and then starts a fanfare performance based on the jackpot start command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103, and continues the fanfare until the regular jackpot opening opens and the jackpot round begins.

As shown in FIG. 15-24(c1), as the congratulatory part in the fanfare performance, an image congratulating the player on the big win (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!") is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound congratulating the player on the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 is changed to a lighting state congratulating the player on the big win. In addition, as a right-hit promotion performance, a small right-hit promotion performance is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and text (in this example, the text "right hit") is displayed small in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. The image display device 5 has multiple layers, and a predetermined image can be displayed on each layer. As shown in FIG. 15-24(c1), the image consisting of a figure and text in the small right-hit promotion performance is displayed on a layer on the front side (toward the player as seen from the pachinko game machine 1) of the image congratulating the player on the big win (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!"). In addition, in the fanfare performance, a sound encouraging right-hitting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and further, as a right-hitting promotion performance, the lighting state of the right-hitting display unit 075F030 and the right-hitting display unit 075F055 changes to a state encouraging right-hitting (lighting in this example). The start order of the above-mentioned image display and lighting is as follows. First, after the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0 command) and a right-hitting display lighting command (FD command), and lights up the right-hitting display unit 075F030. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the right-hitting display unit 075F055 based on the received right-hitting display lighting command (FD command), while displaying an image consisting of figures and letters in the small right-hitting promotion performance and an image celebrating the jackpot based on the received jackpot start designation command (A0 command) on the image display device 5. At this time, the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance located closer to the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image celebrating the big win. That is, first, the lamps are turned on in the order of the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055, and then the images consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance and the image celebrating the big win are displayed in that order. In addition, the display of the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance and the lighting of the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055 are performed until the pattern is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. At that time, first, after the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right hit display off designation command together with a background designation command, and turns off the right hit display unit 075F030. The performance control CPU 120 turns off the right hit display unit 075F055 based on the received right hit display off designation command, while ending the display of the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance and displaying the normal background image on the image display device 5 based on the received background designation command. Note that the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance and the lighting by the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055 may start and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance coincides with the lighting period by the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055, making it easier for the player to understand the period for hitting right.

As shown in FIG. 15-24 (c2), as a name display part in the fanfare performance, a part of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred (in this example, "CHANCE" from the text image "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from speakers 8L, 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting state corresponding to the start of the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 15-25(c3), as the name display part in the fanfare effect, following FIG. 15-24(c2), the remaining part of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred (in this example, "BONUS!!" from the text image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5. As a result, the text image of "CHANCE BONUS!!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off in preparation for the big right hit promotion effect that is executed in the right hit promotion part of the fanfare effect that starts from the next timing. After that, from FIG. 15-24(c4) to FIG. 15-33(c29), a big right hit promotion effect is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and text (in this example, the text "right hit") is displayed large in the center of the image display device 5 as a right hit promotion effect.

Here, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare performance and the big right hit promotion performance based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table shown in FIG. 15-34 to FIG. 15-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance moves the light-emitting part of the frame lamp based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table to emit a guide light to encourage the player to hit the right. In this embodiment, the light-emitting part literally refers to the part that emits light. For example, the part where the light-emitting lamp is located among the multiple lamps included in the frame lamp is called the light-emitting part, and the part where the other lamps that are not lit (i.e., the lamps that are turned off) are located is not called the light-emitting part. In other examples, the light-emitting part refers to the part that emits light with high brightness. For example, the part where the light-emitting lamp is located among the multiple lamps included in the frame lamp is called the light-emitting part, and the part where the lamp that is lit with a brightness lower than the brightness of the lamp located in the light-emitting part is not called the light-emitting part. The lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the performance control CPU 120 is explained in detail below.

Figure 15-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table. As shown in Figure 15-34, in the parent table in the lighting data table, the performance time of each of the fanfare effects and the big right hit promotion effects is specified for each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the movable body lamp 9d, the bottom left lamp 075F009D, the attacca top lamp 075F009U, the board left lamp 075F009E, the board right lamp 075F009F, and the attacca lamp 9c. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is set to perform a fanfare effect for 9880 msec, and then a big right hit promotion effect for 2000 msec. In addition, the big right hit promotion effect is configured to be repeated multiple times (twice in this embodiment), so the game effect lamp 9 will repeat the 2000 msec big right hit promotion effect twice.

Figure 15-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in a lighting data table. As shown in Figure 15-35, in the child table in the lighting data table, the time for each of the fanfare effects and big right hit promotion effects for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referenced for each time period is specified.

Here, for the big right hit promotion effect, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L are assigned a common grandchild table W11. In addition, the bottom left lamp 075F009D, the attacca top lamp 075F009U, and the board left lamp 075F009E are not used in the big right hit promotion effect and are turned off, so no grandchild tables are provided. This allows the capacity of the lighting data used in the ROM 121 to be reduced as much as possible. For the attacca lamp 9c, the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect, 2000 msec, is further divided into multiple periods, and multiple grandchild tables are assigned. For example, grandchild table A11a is assigned to 330 msec, grandchild table A11b is assigned to 1350 msec, and grandchild table A11c is assigned to 320 msec.

Figures 15-36 and 15-37 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a grandchild table in a lighting data table. Figure 15-36 shows data in grandchild table W11 for frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L. As shown in Figure 15-36, in grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data is specified over T1 to T56 at 30 msec intervals, and further data for all lamps being off (0x000000) is specified at the final time of 1000 msec (T57). Note that in the grandchild table, data for lamps 1 to 11 as shown in Figure 15-2 is specified for each of frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L. Also, in Figure 15-36, to clearly indicate the lighting period for each lamp included in the frame lamp, dashed circles are added to the data (F00) at the timing when lighting starts and the data (000) at the timing when lighting ends.

Looking at the data in the grandchild table W11, first at T1, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T2, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T3, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T4, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T5, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T6, At T3 the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T7 the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T8 the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T9 the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T10 the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T11 the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. After lighting begins, each lamp continues to light up while changing color to form seven colors. After that, first, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T46, then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T47, then the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T48, then the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T49, then the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T50, and then the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T51. The third lamp of 075F009R is turned off, then the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T52, then the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T53, then the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T54, then the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T55, then the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T56. After that, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. In other words, the time used to turn the lights on is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, so there is only about 320 msec remaining, but to ensure that the remaining time is completely turned off, the final time to turn the lights off is set to 1000 msec (T57), which is longer than the remaining time. Note that the first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the left frame lamp 075F009L and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the right frame lamp 075F009R are turned off for the entire time.

When the grandchild table W11, which stores the above-mentioned data, is used, as shown in Fig. 15-25 (c4) to Fig. 15-32 (c24), the frame lamps will light up in seven colors, starting with the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L and going from the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R in an arch shape from the left to the right. This kind of big right hit promotion effect using the frame lamps will be performed twice.

Figure 15-37 shows data in the grandchild table K11 for the movable body lamp 9d and the grandchild tables A11a to A11c for the attacca lamp 9c. As shown in Figure 15-37, in the grandchild table K11 for the movable body lamp 9d, RGB data is specified over T1 to T56 at 30 msec intervals, and further, at the last time of 1000 msec (T57), data for turning off (0x000000) is specified for all lamps. In addition, in the grandchild table K11, data is specified for each of the left X (left X), center X (center X), and right X (right X) of the character "XXX" attached to the movable body 32 for the movable body lamp 9d. Also, in Figure 15-37, in order to easily indicate the lighting period for each lamp included in the movable body lamp 9d, a dashed circle is attached to the data at the timing when lighting starts (F00) and the data at the timing when lighting ends (000).

Referring to the data in the grandchild table K11, first the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at T3, then the middle X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at T4, and then the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at T5. After starting to turn on, each lamp continues to turn on while changing color to seven colors. Then, first the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T48, then the middle X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T49, and then the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T50. Then, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and continue to be turned off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. That is, the time spent turning it on is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, so there is only about 320 msec remaining, but to ensure that the remaining time is spent turning it off, the final turn-off time is set to 1000 msec (T57), which is longer than the remaining time. Also, compared to the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable body lamp 9d starts to turn on later than the frame lamp (i.e., it remains off for the first T1 and T2), and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

As shown in Fig. 15-25(c4) to Fig. 15-32(c24), when the grandchild table K11 in which the data described above is stored is used, the movable body lamp 9d goes out while the fourth lamp and the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L are on, and then the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out, and then each lamp continues to light up in seven colors, and then the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out. As a result, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in seven colors, starting with the lighting of the left X, then the middle X lamp, and then the right X lamp, drawing an arch from the left side to the right side. This kind of big right hit promotion performance by the movable body lamp 9d is performed twice.

Figure 15-37 also shows the data in grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacca lamp 9c. As shown in Figure 15-37, in the grandchild table A11a for the attacca lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long period of time, 600,000 msec, compared to the 330 msec that is the target for lighting, and the data specified is off (0x000000).

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacca lamp 9c, RGB data is specified at 20 msec intervals for the 1350 msec that it is to light up. However, because the attacca lamp 9c only repeats color changes in a specific pattern (e.g., seven colors) over the 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b specifies only 280 nsec for one color change pattern. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the attacca lamp 9c for 280 nsec each time it refers to the grandchild table A11b at 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until the end of the 1350 msec to repeat the color changes in the specific pattern (e.g., seven colors).

In the grandchild table A11c of the Attacka lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long period of time, 600,000 msec, compared to the 320 msec that is the target for turning the lamp on, and the data specified is off (0x000000).

When the big right hit promotion performance is started, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the attacca lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, then causes the attacca lamp 9c to repeat color changes in a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) by referring to the grandchild table A11b multiple times at 280 nsec intervals for 1,350 msec, and then turns off the attacca lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11c for the final 320 msec. As a result, as shown in Figures 15-25 (c4) to 15-32 (c24), the frame lamps light up in an arch from the left to the right, and eventually the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R reaches the vicinity of the attacca, and then the attacca lamp 9c lights up, and then the frame lamps go out in an arch from the left to the right, and eventually the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R goes out, and then the attacca lamp 9c goes out. This kind of big right hit promotion effect using the attacca lamp 9c is performed twice.

In addition, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacca lamp 9c, where the lamp is initially turned off, a predetermined pattern of colors is repeated in the middle, and then the lamp is turned off again, the lighting of the attacca lamp 9c is divided into three stages and a scenario is created. For the repetition of the predetermined pattern of colors in the middle, the same grandchild table A11b is repeatedly referenced. This eliminates the need to prepare data for the entire duration of the 2000 msec lighting from start to finish, and only the data for the repeated portion is required. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 15-25 (c4), we will now explain the presentation mode of the big right hit promotion presentation executed in the right hit promotion part of the fanfare presentation. As shown in FIG. 15-25 (c4), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L begins to light up. In line with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right hit promotion presentation.

As shown in FIG. 15-25 (c5), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-26 (c6), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts to light up. Furthermore, as the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the movable body lamp 9d, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-26 (c7), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts to light up. Furthermore, the center X of the movable body lamp 9d starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-26 (c8), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. Furthermore, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-27 (c9), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-27 (c10), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-27 (c11), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. Furthermore, as the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the board right lamp 075F009F, the board right lamp 075F009F starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-28 (c12), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-28 (c13), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-28 (c14), an arrow image pointing to the right continues to be displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-29 (c15), on the image display device 5, the character image "Right" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing in the right direction. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out. Furthermore, as the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the attacca lamp 9c, the attacca lamp 9c starts to light up. From that point on, the attacca lamp 9c repeatedly lights up and goes out (i.e., it flashes). In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-29 (c16), the image display device 5 continues to display the character image "Right" superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-29 (c17), on the image display device 5, the text image "Right Hit" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-30 (c18), on the image display device 5, the text image "Right Hit" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the center X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-30 (c19), on the image display device 5, the text image "Right Hit" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In addition, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-30 (c20), on the image display device 5, the text image "Right Hit" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-31 (c21), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-31 (c22), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-31 (c23), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right!!" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R goes out. Furthermore, the board right lamp 075F009F goes out. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-32 (c24), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right!!" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right!!" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R goes out. Furthermore, the flashing attacca lamp 9c also goes out. Sound output from speakers 8L and 8R also stops. This ends the first series of big right-hit promotion effects.

As shown in FIG. 15-32 (c26), the second big right hit promotion effect starts. At this time, of the game effect lamps 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts to light up. Note that during the second big right hit promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are designed not to output sound in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion effect. This prevents the background music during the big hit round (sound corresponding to the background of the big hit round) from overlapping with the sound during the big right hit promotion effect when the transition occurs after the big right hit promotion effect has ended.

As shown in Figure 15-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second big right hit promotion performance, the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks/goes off in the same manner as in the first big right hit promotion performance, and during that time, no sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R in the manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

In this way, the big right hit promotion effect uses larger text and graphic image displays than the small right hit promotion effect, and is an effect that encourages the player to hit to the right in a more emphatic manner than the small right hit promotion effect. Therefore, by executing the big right hit promotion effect during the fanfare effect, it is possible to encourage the player to hit to the right in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, during the first big right hit promotion performance, a sound (for example, a whirring sound effect) is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance, effectively encouraging the player to hit to the right, while during the second big right hit promotion performance, a sound is not output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance, so as not to interfere with the background music during the big win round that starts afterwards.

In addition, in the big right hit promotion effect, the arrow image and the letter image are displayed so that they gradually appear in stages, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks to effectively encourage the player to hit to the right, and this effect is more flashy than the effect that displays the name image of the big win game state shown in Figure 15-24 (c2). For example, the letter images in the big right hit promotion effect appear one by one, but all the letter images in the name image of the big win game state appear at once. Also, the size of the letter images in the big right hit promotion effect is larger than all the letter images in the name image of the big win game state. Furthermore, the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect is longer than the execution time of the effect that displays the name image. As a result, after the name image of the big win game state is displayed to notify the player that a big win has occurred, the big right hit promotion effect can more emphasize the player to hit to the right.

The attacca lamp 9c is the point that the player aims at when launching the game ball in order to actually carry the game ball, so it lights up in a flashy color that is easy for the player to recognize, such as seven colors, and flashes to draw the player's attention to the point that they are aiming at. Note that the attacca lamp 9c may also be constantly lit in a predetermined color, such as seven colors, without flashing.

The following example describes the presentation of the pachinko game machine 1 when a 5R special jackpot occurs. For a 10R special jackpot, the number of rounds is different, but other presentation aspects are the same as for a 5R special jackpot. Also, for a 5 regular jackpot, it is different in that the V preview presentation and V winning presentation are not executed, but other presentation aspects are the same as for a 5R special jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 15-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 goes out and the second big right hit promotion effect ends, the switch to the big win round starts as shown in FIG. 15-38 (c27). Specifically, the arrow image and the text image "Hit right!!" fade out, gradually decreasing visibility. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 15-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 turns white. Note that the image of the small right hit promotion effect displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-out. Note that, as described above, a series of performance data up to the stage of FIG. 15-38 (c28) is set based on the big win start designation command (A0 series command).

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 sends a command (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 to specify that the large prize opening is in progress. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the round-in-progress effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the round-in-progress effect in the first round. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data for each effect in FIG. 15-39 (d3) to FIG. 15-40 (e4) based on the command (A101 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIG. 15-39 (d3) to FIG. 15-40 (e4) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-39 (d3), the entire screen of the image display device 5 goes completely white, and then the background image during the big win round fades in to appear. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner that corresponds to the fade-in. Note that the image of the small right hit promotion effect displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, we will explain "fade in" and "fade out" in more detail. Fade in and fade out are a type of image display effect called a "transition." A "transition" is a switching effect that is inserted between a first cut (image) and a second cut (image) when editing video and the scene changes from the first cut to the second cut (image). In addition to fade in and fade out, transitions also include various techniques used in video editing, such as wipes and overlaps.

"Fade-in" is an effect in which an image showing some object (such as a background or character) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific technique, fade-in changes the transparency (also called transmittance) of the object (image) from a first degree (e.g., 100% or 99%) to a second degree (e.g., 0% or 1%) that is lower than the first degree over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined period is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually changed from 100% (first degree) to 50% over the 1 second period between 0 and 1 second, and then the transparency (transmittance) is gradually changed from 50% to 0% (second degree) over the next 1 second period between 1 and 2 seconds. On the other hand, fade-in is not a technique that does not gradually decrease the transparency (transmittance) over a certain period of time, such as a technique that changes an object (image) to opaque by switching the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) in one go. Note that if opacity (which can also be called opacity) is changed instead of transparency (transmittance), the above-mentioned percentage values are reversed. In other words, fade-in changes the opacity (opacity) of an object (image) from a second degree (e.g., 0% or 1%) to a first degree (e.g., 100% or 99%), which is higher than the second degree, over a certain period of time.

"Fade out" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific technique, in fade out, the transparency (transmittance) of the object (image) is changed over a predetermined time from a second degree (e.g., 0% or 1%) to a first degree (e.g., 100% or 99%) that is higher than the first degree. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually changed from 0% (second degree) to 50% over one second between 0 and 1 second, and then the transparency (transmittance) is gradually changed from 50% to 100% (first degree) over one second between 1 and 2 seconds. On the other hand, a technique that does not gradually change the transparency (transmittance) over a predetermined time, such as a technique that changes the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) in one go to make the object (image) transparent, is not a fade out. In addition, when changing opacity (opacity) instead of transparency (transmittance), the fade-out changes the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) from a first degree (e.g., 100% or 99%) to a second degree (e.g., 0% or 1%) that is lower than the first degree over a predetermined period of time.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-38(c26) and (d1), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen showing the arrow image and the text image of "Hit right!!" is 0%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is gradually increased to 100%, so that the arrow image and the text image of "Hit right!!" are gradually made transparent and difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 15-38(d2), only the white image in the second layer of the screen, which is located further back than the first layer of the screen, is shown to the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 15-38(d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is gradually decreased to 0%, so that the background image during the big win round is gradually made opaque and easy to see (fade in). This allows the player to see the background image during the jackpot round on the first layer, which is located in front of the second layer of the screen.

Note that there is also a technique called "cross-fade" as a transition. Cross-fade is a technique in which, for example, a first layer of a screen showing some kind of object is faded out while a second layer of a screen showing some kind of object located behind the first layer is faded in, so that the first layer of the screen is shown first and then the second layer of the screen is shown. On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, as described above, the first layer of the screen is faded out and then faded in, so that a white image that is always displayed on the second layer of the screen located behind is shown once during the switch from the image in the ED first period to the image in the ED second period, which is different from a technique like cross-fade.

In this embodiment, even if the background image is switched as in the transition described above, the image of the small right hit promotion effect displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the background image switching. Here, "affected by the background image switching" means that the player's visibility is affected in some way, such as by fading in or out of the background image switching, which may cause the player to be unable to completely see the image of the small right hit promotion effect, or the player to be able to see a little of the image of the small right hit promotion effect but not understand the meaning of the image (right hit promotion). On the other hand, if the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image of the small right hit promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, it can be said that the image of the small right hit promotion effect is not affected by the background image switching.

As shown in FIG. 15-39(d4), after the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in, as shown in FIG. 15-39(e1), when 1R starts, the normal jackpot opening opens and a background image corresponding to the round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed in the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance is displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the round performance. In addition, the speakers 8L and 8R start to output BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the jackpot round) in a manner corresponding to the round performance. In addition, as mentioned above, at the time this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the large right hit promotion performance has already ended.

As shown in FIG. 15-40 (e2), during the first round, a background image corresponding to the in-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, followed by an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 15-40 (e3), when the first round ends, the regular large prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A201 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

As shown in FIG. 15-40 (e4), between rounds, the regular big prize opening remains closed, and a background image corresponding to the in-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, followed by an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance displayed in the upper right.

When the inter-round period ends, the CPU 103 sends a special prize opening command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the mid-round performance in the second round based on the command from the CPU 103. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 15-41 (e5) to FIG. 15-42 (e8) based on the special prize opening command (A102 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 15-41 (e5) to FIG. 15-42 (e8) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-41 (e5), when the second round starts, the regular big prize opening opens, a background image corresponding to the mid-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-41 (e6), during 2R, a V probability change suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, an image encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed with the text image "PUSH!!" superimposed on a background image corresponding to the in-round effect. In addition, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) encouraging a small right hit is still displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the in-round effect (such as a V probability change suggestion effect). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the in-round effect (such as a V probability change suggestion effect).

As shown in FIG. 15-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B during the V-type probability variation indication effect, a text image of "Success!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the in-round effect, to notify the player that a V-type probability variation jackpot has been obtained. In addition, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) for the small right hit promotion effect continues to be displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the in-round effect (such as the V-type probability variation indication effect). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the in-round effect (such as the V-type probability variation indication effect).

As shown in FIG. 15-42 (e8), when the second round ends, the regular large prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

As shown in FIG. 15-42 (e9), between rounds, the regular big prize opening remains closed, and a text image of "Success!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the performance during the round, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the inter-round period ends, the CPU 103 sends a special prize opening command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the mid-round performance in the third round based on the command from the CPU 103. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 15-42 (e10) to FIG. 15-43 (e12) based on the special prize opening command (A103 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 15-42 (e10) to FIG. 15-43 (e12) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-42 (e10), when the third round begins, the regular big prize opening opens and the V preview performance is executed. Specifically, a character image and a text image saying "Grab a V in the next round!!" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the mid-round performance. In addition, an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance (V preview performance, etc.). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance (V preview performance, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 15-43 (e11), during the third round, the V preview performance continues, and a text image of "Grab a V in the next round!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 together with a character image, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the performance during the round, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion performance continues to be displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as the V preview performance). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as the V preview performance).

As shown in FIG. 15-43 (e12), when the third round ends, the regular large prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A203 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening opens. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the "Aim for V" performance in the rounds from after the third round to the fourth round, based on the command from the CPU 103.

As shown in FIG. 15-43 (e13), the Aim for V performance is executed between rounds while the large prize opening remains closed, i.e., the game ball cannot enter the large prize opening. Specifically, an arrow image pointing to the V variable prize ball device 075F007B (V large prize opening), which is the target (location) that the player is to aim at by hitting with the right hand, and a text image saying "Aim" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to overlap with a background image corresponding to the round performance. In this way, according to the Aim for V performance, the image display related to the V large prize opening can be used to encourage the player to hit with the right hand to make the game ball enter the V large prize opening. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the round performance (such as the Aim for V performance). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the round performance (such as the Aim for V performance).

When the inter-round period ends, the CPU 103 sends a special prize opening command (A104 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the mid-round performance in the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 104. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each of the performances in Figures 15-44 (e14) and (e15) based on the special prize opening command (A104 command). In other words, each of the performances that take place between Figures 15-44 (e14) and 15-44 (e15) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V large prize opening opens and the Aim for V effect is then executed. This allows the player to aim for the V large prize opening by hitting to the right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round effect (such as the Aim for V effect). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the mid-round effect (such as the Aim for V effect).

As shown in FIG. 15-44 (e15), during the 4R, the Aim for V effect is executed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion effect is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the Aim for V effect). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the Aim for V effect).

When a game ball enters the V large winning hole and a V win occurs, the CPU 103 sends a command to the performance control CPU 120 to specify the probability of winning (AD00 command). In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the V winning performance. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 15-44 (e16) to FIG. 15-45 (e18) based on the command to specify the probability of winning (AD00 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 15-44 (e16) to FIG. 15-45 (e18) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-44 (e16), when the V winning effect is executed, an image of a "V" indicating that a V winning has occurred is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the mid-round effect, and then an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion effect is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round effect (such as the V winning effect). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the mid-round effect (such as the V winning effect).

As shown in FIG. 15-45 (e17), when the 4th round ends, the V large prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

As shown in FIG. 15-45 (e18), between rounds, the V large prize opening and the normal large prize opening remain closed, and an image of the letter "V" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the performance during the round, and furthermore, an image (arrow and letters) of the small right hit promotion performance is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the inter-round period ends, the CPU 103 sends a special prize opening command (A105 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the mid-round performance for the 5th round based on the command from the CPU 103. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 15-45 (e19) to FIG. 15-46 (e21) based on the special prize opening command (A105 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 15-45 (e19) to FIG. 15-46 (e21) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the regular big prize opening opens, a background image corresponding to the mid-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then an image (arrow and text) for promoting a small right hit is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-46 (e20), during the 5th round, a mid-round performance is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion performance continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-46 (e21), when the 5th round ends, the large prize opening normally closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A205 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify the time after the large prize opening is opened. The performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command. Furthermore, at a specified timing thereafter, the CPU 103 sends a command (A3 command) to specify the end of the jackpot to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes an ending performance based on the command from the CPU 103. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 15-46 (f1) to FIG. 15-47 (f4) based on the command (A3 command). In other words, each of the effects that take place between FIG. 15-46 (f1) and FIG. 15-47 (f4) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-46 (f1), when the ending performance starts, an image that allows the player to select a stage in the probability variable state after the big win game state is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-47 (f2), during the ending performance, a name image indicating the name of the special state (in this example, a text image of "Yume Yume RUSH!!") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 together with a character image. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance. Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-47 (f3), during the ending performance, an addiction prevention notification performance is executed. Specifically, an image to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as "Be careful not to become addicted. Pachinko is a game that should be enjoyed in moderation," is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) for encouraging a small right hit is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending performance. In addition, when a consecutive win occurs, a game result image showing the game result (for example, the number of winning balls) in the jackpot game state is displayed, for example, at the bottom of the screen during the ending performance, but such a game result image may also be displayed during the ending performance even when a first win occurs.

As shown in FIG. 15-47 (f4), a forget-to-remove prevention image for preventing the player from forgetting to remove a card related to the game that the player owns, such as a prepaid card or a membership card, is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

After the ending performance is finished, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a pattern change designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a change pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 changes and displays the decorative pattern in response to the change of the second special pattern based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes a change-in-progress performance (for example, a reach performance or a notice performance) in accordance with the change of the second special pattern. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance in Figure 15-48 (g1) and (g2) based on the reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command), pattern change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command). In other words, each of the effects that take place between Figure 15-48 (g1) and (g2) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-48 (g1), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of the special symbol change. Sounds are also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of the special symbol change.

As shown in FIG. 15-48 (g2), the variation of the second special symbol stops and the losing symbol is displayed. At this time, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbol. Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbol.

After the second special symbol stops changing, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a symbol change designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a change pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 changes and displays the decorative symbol in response to the change of the second special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes a change-in-progress performance (for example, a reach performance or a notice performance) in accordance with the change of the second special symbol. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in Figure 15-48 (g3) to Figure 15-49 (g5) based on the reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command), symbol change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command). In other words, each of the effects that take place between FIG. 15-48 (g3) and FIG. 15-49 (g5) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-48 (g3), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of the special symbol change. The speakers 8L and 8R also output sounds in a manner corresponding to the start of the special symbol change.

As shown in FIG. 15-49 (g4), in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach effect. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion effect continues to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 15-49 (g5), a group preview performance is executed as a preview performance during a jackpot fluctuation. The group preview performance is a performance in which objects such as characters appear gradually or all at once on the screen of the image display device 5 to make the visibility of the reach pattern difficult, and then the objects disappear to make a specific pattern arrangement (for example, 777) appear. Even if a preview performance that makes the visibility of the pattern difficult is executed in such a reach mode, the image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen without being affected by the display of the performance image. Here, "affected by the display of the performance image" means that the player's visibility of the image of the small right hit promotion performance is hindered or reduced by the display of a performance image such as a group preview, such that the player cannot completely see the image of the small right hit promotion performance, or the player can see a little of the image of the small right hit promotion performance but cannot understand the meaning of the image (right hit promotion), and the player's visibility is affected in some way. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image of the small right hit promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, it can be said that the image of the small right hit promotion effect is not affected by the display of the effect image.

When the variation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 sends a symbol determination command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the symbol determination command.

As shown in FIG. 15-49 (g6), when a jackpot (10R guaranteed jackpot) occurs as a result of the special symbol stopping, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start command (A0 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that since the right-hit promotion performance has already been executed, the right-hit display lighting command (FD command) is not sent. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 executes a fanfare performance based on a command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 15-50 (h1) and (h2) based on the jackpot start command (A0 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 15-50 (h1) and (h2) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-50 (h1), as a fanfare effect, an image celebrating the big win (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Yay!!") is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound celebrating the big win is output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting state celebrating the big win. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) for promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2), after the fanfare effect starts, a name image (in this example, a text image of "SPECIAL BONUS!!") indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting state corresponding to the start of the jackpot. In addition, in the case of a consecutive win with a hit on special chart 2, since the big right hit promotion effect has already been executed when the special chart 1 was hit, the big right hit promotion effect is not executed again. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 15-25 (c4) to FIG. 15-32 (c24), the speakers 8L and 8R do not output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect, and furthermore, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect.

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 sends a command (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 to specify that the large prize opening is open. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the mid-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the mid-round effect for the first round.

As shown in FIG. 15-50 (i1), when the first round of the big win begins, the normal big prize opening opens, and a background image corresponding to the in-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, followed by an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the in-round performance.

After that, although not shown, various effects such as the V preview effect, the Aim for V effect, and the V prize are executed during the round as shown in Fig. 15-40 to Fig. 15-46, and when the big win round ends, an ending effect is executed as shown in Fig. 15-46 and Fig. 15-47. Then, as shown in Fig. 15-48, the game is again controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state. During this series of games, an image (arrow and letters) of a small right hit promotion effect is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and the right hit display section 075F030 of the special symbol LED board 075F020 and the right hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 each continue to light up. When the probability state after the jackpot game state ends without a jackpot occurring and the state is controlled to the normal state, the CPU 103 sends a right-hit display off command to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120 erases the image (arrow and text) of the small right-hit promotion performance in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and turns off the right-hit display section 075F030 of the special symbol LED board 075F020 and the right-hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. This allows the player to hit left again in the normal state.

[Presentation of the Pachinko Game Machine 1 When Power is Restored from an Outage]
Fig. 15-51 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored from a power outage during fanfare presentation due to a special chart 1. The power outage shown in Fig. 15-51 assumes power outage 1 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during fanfare presentation as shown in Fig. 15-20 and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 15-51, if a power outage occurs in any of the following states, an image congratulating the player on a big win (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 15-24(c1) state), a name image indicating the name of the big win game state (in this example, a text image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 15-24(c2) state), only an arrow image in the big right hit promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 15-28(c14) state), and a text image of "Hit right!!" is displayed on the image display device 5 together with an arrow image in the big right hit promotion effect (FIG. 15-31(c23) state), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then the text image of "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A101 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the command (A101 command) is received, the performance image during 1R, such as that shown in FIG. 15-39 (e1), is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the command (A101 command). In addition, all of the images, such as the image congratulating the player on the big win (in this example, the character image and the text image "Congratulations!!"), the name image indicating the name of the big win game state (in this example, the text image "CHANCE BONUS!!"), the arrow image in the big right hit promotion performance, and the text image "Hit right!!" added to the arrow image in the big right hit promotion performance, are canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs before the big right hit promotion effect is executed or before the big right hit promotion effect is completed, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to minimize the disadvantage to the player, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the regular big prize opening.

Figure 15-52 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored from a power outage during the first round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 15-52 assumes power outage 2, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 15-20.

As shown in Figure 15-52, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the performance during round 1 is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 15-40 (e2)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then when the power is turned on, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance waits until it receives a command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the CPU 120 receives the command, it displays a performance image during 2R, such as that shown in FIG. 15-41 (e5), on the image display device 5 based on the command (A102 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power outage. If prize balls are obtained during the subsequent rounds, the points can be added again starting from 0pt, for example, by adding 10pt for every 10 balls obtained. Note that the point image is not limited to being displayed as 0pt after the power outage is restored, and the points can be made unclear by a predetermined image such as "??".

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a big win round, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned back on, so the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to minimize the disadvantage to the player, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big win opening in the next round.

Figure 15-53 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage during the round after one round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 15-53 assumes power outage 3, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after one round, as shown in Figure 15-20, and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in Figure 15-53, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the performance between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 15-40 (e4)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then when the power is turned on, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the command (A102 command) is received, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image during 2R, such as that shown in FIG. 15-41 (e5), based on the command (A102 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big win round is displayed as 0pt, since the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big prize opening in the next round.

Figure 15-54 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage during the 2nd round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 15-54 assumes power outage 4, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 15-20.

As shown in Figure 15-54, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the V-variable indication effect during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 15-41 (e7)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then the text image "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A103 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command (A103 command), it causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image during 2R based on the command (A103 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt, since the memory of the points in RAM 122 is erased by the power outage. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview performance such as that in Figure 15-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. Furthermore, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120 in addition to the large prize opening open command (A103 command) after power is restored, the performance control CPU 120 can be configured to execute a V preview performance like that shown in FIG. 15-42 (e10) based on the large prize opening open command (A103 command) and the jackpot start command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a big win round, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned back on, so the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to minimize the disadvantage to the player, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big win opening in the next round.

Figure 15-55 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage between two rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 15-55 assumes power outage 5, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off between two rounds after the jackpot, as shown in Figure 15-20, and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in Figure 15-55, if a power outage occurs when an image corresponding to the second round is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 15-42 (e9)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then when the power is turned on, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A103 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command (A103 command), it causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image during 2R based on the command (A103 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt, since the memory of the points in RAM 122 is erased by the power outage. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview performance such as that in Figure 15-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. Furthermore, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120 in addition to the large prize opening open command (A103 command) after power is restored, the performance control CPU 120 can be configured to execute a V preview performance like that shown in FIG. 15-42 (e10) based on the large prize opening open command (A103 command) and the jackpot start command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big prize opening in the next round.

Figure 15-56 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of a pachinko gaming machine when power is restored after a power outage between rounds three rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 15-56 assumes power outage 6, which occurs when the power supply to pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off between rounds three rounds after the jackpot, as shown in Figure 15-21, and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in Figure 15-56, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the round after the third round is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 15-43 (e13)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then when the power is turned on, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A104 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command (A104 command), it causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image during the 4R based on the command (A104 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt, because the memory of the points in RAM 122 is erased by the power outage. Also, because the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the Aim for V performance as shown in Figure 15-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. Furthermore, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120 in addition to the large prize opening open command (A104 command) after power is restored, the performance control CPU 120 can be configured to execute the Aim for V performance as shown in FIG. 15-44 (e14) based on the large prize opening open command (A103 command) and the jackpot start command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the V large prize opening in the next round.

Figure 15-57 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage during the 4th round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 15-57 assumes power outage 7, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 15-21.

As shown in FIG. 15-57, if a power outage occurs when an image corresponding to the Aim for V in 4R presentation is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 15-44 (e15)), or when an image corresponding to the V winning presentation is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 15-44 (e16)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the text image "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A105 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the command (A105 command) is received, the performance image during the 5th round, such as that shown in FIG. 15-45 (e19), is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the command (A105 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0 points, since the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a big win round, the small right hit promotion effect is executed from the point when the power is turned on after that, so the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored from the power outage, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to enter the normal big prize opening in the next round. Furthermore, in the case where a power outage occurs while the Aim for V effect and the small right hit promotion effect are being executed together, as in the 4th round, and in the case where a power outage occurs while the small right hit promotion effect and the large right hit promotion effect are being executed together, as shown in Figure 15-51 above, both have in common that after the power is restored from the power outage, the Aim for V effect and the large right hit promotion effect are not executed, but the small right hit promotion effect is executed to the very least. Therefore, in both situations, the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored in a common manner.

Figure 15-58 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage between rounds four rounds after a jackpot on special chart 1. The power outage shown in Figure 15-58 assumes power outage 8, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off between rounds four rounds after the jackpot, as shown in Figure 15-21, and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in Figure 15-58, if a power outage occurs during the rounds after the 4th round when an image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 15-45 (e18)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the text image "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A105 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the command (A105 command) is received, the performance image during the 5th round is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the command (A105 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0 points because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big prize opening in the next round.

Figure 15-59 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored from a power outage during the final round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 15-59 assumes power outage 9, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 5R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 15-21.

As shown in Figure 15-59, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the mid-round performance during the 5th round is displayed on the image display device 5 (as shown in Figure 15-46 (e20)), or while the 5th round has ended (as shown in Figure 15-46 (e21)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then the text image "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a jackpot end command (A3 system command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end command (A3 system command), it displays a performance image corresponding to the ending performance as shown in Figure 15-46 (f1) on the image display device 5 based on the jackpot end command (A3 system command).

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the final round of a jackpot, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned back on, so that the player can be encouraged to make a right hit at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to make a right hit as much as possible.

Figure 15-60 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored from a power outage during the ending presentation when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 15-60 assumes a power outage 10 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the ending presentation and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 15-21.

As shown in FIG. 15-60, if a power outage occurs during any of the ending effects, in which an image for selecting a stage in the high probability state after a jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 15-46(f1)), in which a name image showing the name of the high probability state together with a character image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 15-47(f2)), in which an image corresponding to the addiction prevention notification effect and a game result image showing the game result in the jackpot game state are displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 15-47(f3)), and in which a forget-to-remove prevention image for preventing the player from forgetting to remove a card owned by the player is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 15-47(f4)), the image on the image display device 5 will no longer be displayed, and then the text image "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

After that, if there are reserved memories, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command), pattern change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives these commands, it displays a performance image corresponding to the change in the special pattern as shown in Figure 15-48 (g1) on the image display device 5 based on the reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command), pattern change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command).

On the other hand, if there are no reserved memories, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103, and upon receiving these commands, it restores the display on the image display device 5 with the initial pattern (in this example, the decorative pattern and small pattern "123") stopped based on the background designation command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command).

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the ending, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on afterwards, so the player can be encouraged to make a right hit at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering disadvantages such as forgetting to make a right hit and not being able to win in the second start winning slot in the special probability state after the jackpot game state.

[Major effects obtained by characteristic part 075F]
Below, the technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the above-mentioned feature portion 075F are listed individually.

(1-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right hit suggestion effect or an "Aim for V" effect by the effect control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging a player to hit to the right) that uses an image display to encourage a player to launch the game medium toward a second flow path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) along which the game medium can flow in the game area;
a specific area into which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through a V large winning port provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B);
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)), a second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)), and a third guidance display using an image display related to the specific area (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 15-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, during the execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect shown in FIG. 15-25 (c4) to FIG. 15-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-38 (d1) and (d2), a portion in which an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect is ended while an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, while the game medium is in a state in which it is impossible for the game medium to enter the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-43 (e13), an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is performed and an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit Suggestion" effect is continued),
Thereafter, even after the gaming medium has changed from a state in which it is not possible for the gaming medium to enter the specific area to a state in which it is possible for the gaming medium to enter the specific area, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-44 (e15), a portion in which an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect and an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect are continued),
Thereafter, when the game medium enters the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-44 (e16), a portion in which an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is terminated while an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit Suggestion" effect is continued),
When a power outage occurs while the first and second guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 15-31 (c23)), and when a power outage occurs and the power is restored, and when a power outage occurs while the second and third guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to an Aim for V effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 15-44 (e15)), the image display is displayed again in a manner such that the first and third guidance displays are not displayed and the second guidance display is displayed (for example, the portion where the text image "Recovering..." and the image of the small right hit promotion effect are displayed after power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 15-51 and FIG. 15-57).

(1-2) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right hit suggestion effect or an "Aim for V" effect by the effect control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging a player to hit to the right) that uses an image display to encourage a player to launch the game medium toward a second flow path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) along which the game medium can flow in the game area;
a specific area into which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through a V large winning port provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B);
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)), a second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)), and a third guidance display using an image display relating to the specific area (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect as shown in FIG. 15-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, during the execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect shown in FIG. 15-25 (c4) to FIG. 15-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the big right hit suggestion effect is ended while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the closing of the attacker corresponding to the round preceding the round in which the specific area can be entered, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-43 (e13), a portion in which an image corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is displayed and an image corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of an attacker corresponding to a round preceding the round that allows entry into the specific area, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-44 (e15), a portion in which an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect and an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect are continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the game medium entering the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-44 (e16), a portion in which an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is terminated while an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit Suggestion" effect is continued),
When a power outage occurs while the first and second guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 15-31 (c23)), and when a power outage occurs and the power is restored, and when a power outage occurs while the second and third guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to an Aim for V effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 15-44 (e15)), the image display is displayed again in a manner such that the first and third guidance displays are not displayed and the second guidance display is displayed (for example, the portion where the text image "Recovering..." and the image of the small right hit promotion effect are displayed after power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 15-51 and FIG. 15-57).

(1-3) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right hit suggestion effect or an "Aim for V" effect by the effect control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging a player to hit to the right) that uses an image display to encourage a player to launch the game medium toward a second flow path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) along which the game medium can flow in the game area;
a specific area into which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through a V large winning port provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B);
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)), a second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)), and a third guidance display using an image display relating to the specific area (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect as shown in FIG. 15-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, during the execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect shown in FIG. 15-25 (c4) to FIG. 15-38 (c26)),
Then, by receiving a 1R open command (for example, a command to specify that the large prize opening is open (A101 command)), the first information display is terminated while the second information display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the large right hit suggestion effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is continued),
Then, by receiving a command after the end of the third round (for example, a command specifying after the opening of the large prize opening (A203 command)), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-43 (e13), an image corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is displayed and an image corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, by receiving a 4R opening command (for example, a command for designating that the large prize opening is in progress (A104 command)), the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-44 (e15), a portion for continuing the image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect and the image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit Suggestion" effect),
Thereafter, by receiving a V-pass command (for example, a probability change determination device pass command (AD00 command)), the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-44 (e16), a portion in which the image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect is continued),
When a power outage occurs while the first and second guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 15-31 (c23)), and when a power outage occurs and the power is restored, and when a power outage occurs while the second and third guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to an Aim for V effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 15-44 (e15)), the image display is displayed again in a manner such that the first and third guidance displays are not displayed and the second guidance display is displayed (for example, the portion where the text image "Recovering..." and the image of the small right hit promotion effect are displayed after power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 15-51 and FIG. 15-57).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare effect, the large right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect are executed to emphasize the right hit promotion, so that the player is sure to recognize that he will hit the right in the subsequent games, and thereafter, the large right hit promotion effect is terminated while the small right hit promotion effect is continued as it is, so that the player is not appealed to hit the right excessively. In addition, the "Aim for V" effect for aiming at the V large prize winning hole is executed from the point when the V large prize winning hole is still closed, and is continued even after the V large prize winning hole is opened, so that the importance of aiming at the V large prize winning hole is appealed to the player, and it is possible to ensure that the game ball enters the V large prize winning hole. In addition, by terminating the "Aim for V" effect after the V large prize winning hole is closed due to the occurrence of the V prize winning, it is possible to prevent unnecessary promotional notification from being given to the player. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned flow, the small right hit promotion effect is continuously executed, so that the player can be always encouraged to hit the right even before the V large prize winning hole is opened and after the V prize winning occurs. This allows the instruction to the player to hit to the right to be executed in an optimal manner. In addition, in both cases where a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed and the power is restored, and in both cases where a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to an Aim for V effect and an image corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed and the power is restored, the text image "Recovering..." and the image of the small right hit promotion effect are displayed after the power is turned on, so that even if a power outage occurs, the player can be encouraged to continue hitting to the right in subsequent games at the very least.

(2) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by a presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging a player to hit to the right) using an image display to encourage a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) along which the game medium can flow in the game area,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)),
The guidance display means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, during a predetermined period in which a start effect (e.g., a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are displayed (e.g., an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect shown in FIG. 15-25 (c4) to FIG. 15-38 (c26)),
In a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-39 (e1) to FIG. 15-46 (e21), during a jackpot round, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect is not performed while an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect is continued),
In a special state (e.g., a probability variable state, a time-saving state) after the control of the advantageous state ends, the second guidance display is continued (for example, a portion for continuing an image display corresponding to a small right-hit promotion performance in a probability variable state after a big win as shown in FIG. 15-48 and FIG. 15-49),
The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display of the background image (for example, switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in association with the control of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-38 (d1) to FIG. 15-39 (d4), a portion that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out),
The second guidance display is not affected by the display of a performance image in the special state (for example, an image display due to a group preview performance) (for example, a portion that continues to display an image corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance without being affected by the image display due to the group preview performance, as shown in Figure 15-49 (g5)).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare effect, the large right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect are executed to emphasize the right hit promotion, so that the player is sure to recognize that he will hit the right in the subsequent game, and during the subsequent big win round, the large right hit promotion effect is ended while the small right hit promotion effect is continued, so that the player is not appealed to hit the right excessively. In addition, by continuing the small right hit promotion effect even in the probability variable state or time-saving state after the big win game state ends, the player can be encouraged to always hit the right. Furthermore, after the big win occurs, the small right hit promotion effect is not affected by the switching display (fade out, fade in, etc.) that is performed when switching from the fanfare effect to the big win round, and the small right hit promotion effect is not affected by the image display of the group notice effect that is performed in the probability variable state or time-saving state after the big win game state ends, so that the player can be encouraged to always hit the right. This makes it possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit the right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by the presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, a display of an image encouraging a player to shoot a right-hit) that encourages a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, out of a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area);
A guidance means (for example, a process of executing a right hit suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120) that performs guidance light emission to encourage a player by moving the light emitting point of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L) to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path;
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed in a manner more emphasized than the second guidance display, urging the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path (for example, a large right hit promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and figures than a small right hit promotion effect),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display before the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state), which is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state (for example, a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect before the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)), and performs the first guidance display after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a large right hit promotion effect after the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 15-25 to FIG. 15-33).
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission multiple times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in Figs. 15-25 to 15-33, a portion in which the frame lamp is lit in an arch shape from the left side to the right side twice in conjunction with an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion performance),
The sound output means includes:
In conjunction with the first of the multiple guide lights, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light is output (for example, as shown in Fig. 15-25 (c4) to Fig. 15-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first big right hit promotion performance, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance).
Among the multiple times of the guidance light emission, when the last guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-32 (c26) to FIG. 15-33 (c29), when the frame lamp is lit in the second big right hit promotion performance, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-39 (e1), a portion that outputs a sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round after the start of the jackpot round),
In a special state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state ends, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 15-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot on special chart 2, a part in which no sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, after a jackpot occurs, a small right-hit promotion effect is first executed to encourage the player to hit the right modestly, and then a name image showing the name of the jackpot gaming state is displayed to make the player aware that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled. Then, after making the player aware that a jackpot round has started, a large right-hit promotion effect is used to notify the player to hit the right in an emphasized manner, thereby ensuring that the player will hit the right in subsequent games. Also, while the large right-hit promotion effect is being executed, the lit area of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right hits, so that the player can be more effectively encouraged to hit the right. Furthermore, when the first right hit promotion is performed by the frame lamp, a sound corresponding to the right hit promotion is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the right hit promotion, whereas when the last (second in this embodiment) right hit promotion is performed by the frame lamp, a sound corresponding to the right hit promotion is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the right hit promotion. Therefore, the sound corresponding to the right hit promotion does not overlap with the BGM during the jackpot round output after the big right hit promotion performance is executed, and the BGM during the jackpot round can be smoothly heard by the player. Also, in the probability change state or time reduction state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with a special chart 2 hit, since the right hit promotion has already been performed, the big right hit promotion performance is not executed as in the first hit with a special chart 1 hit, and the sound corresponding to the right hit promotion performance linked thereto is not output, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right hit promotion being frequently emphasized. This allows the instruction to the player to hit right to be executed appropriately.

(3-2) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by the presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, a display of an image encouraging a player to shoot a right-hit) that encourages a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, out of a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area);
A guidance means (for example, a process of executing a right hit suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120) that performs guidance light emission to encourage a player by moving the light emitting point of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L) to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path;
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed in a manner more emphasized than the second guidance display, urging the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path (for example, a large right hit promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and figures than a small right hit promotion effect),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display before the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state), which is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state (for example, a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect before the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)), and performs the first guidance display after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a large right hit promotion effect after the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 15-25 to FIG. 15-33).
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission multiple times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in Figs. 15-25 to 15-33, a portion in which the frame lamp is lit in an arch shape from the left side to the right side twice in conjunction with an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion performance),
The sound output means includes:
In conjunction with the first of the multiple guide lights, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light is output (for example, as shown in Fig. 15-25 (c4) to Fig. 15-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first big right hit promotion performance, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance).
Among the multiple times of the guidance light emission, when the last guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-32 (c26) to FIG. 15-33 (c29), when the frame lamp is lit in the second big right hit promotion performance, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-39 (e1), a portion that outputs a sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round after the start of the jackpot round),
The guidance means does not emit the guidance light when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in a special state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state ends (for example, as shown in Figure 15-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot on special chart 2, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, after a jackpot occurs, a small right-hit promotion effect is first executed to encourage the player to hit the right modestly, and then a name image showing the name of the jackpot gaming state is displayed to make the player aware that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled. Then, after making the player aware that a jackpot round has started, a large right-hit promotion effect is used to notify the player to hit the right in an emphasized manner, thereby ensuring that the player will hit the right in subsequent games. Also, while the large right-hit promotion effect is being executed, the lit area of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right hits, so that the player can be more effectively encouraged to hit the right. Furthermore, when the first right hit promotion is performed by the frame lamp, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion in conjunction with the right hit promotion, whereas when the last (second in this embodiment) right hit promotion is performed by the frame lamp, a sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion. Therefore, the sound corresponding to the right hit promotion does not overlap with the BGM during the jackpot round output after the big right hit promotion performance is executed, and the BGM during the jackpot round can be smoothly heard by the player. Also, in the probability change state or time reduction state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with a special chart 2 hit, since the right hit promotion has already been performed, the big right hit promotion performance is not executed as in the first hit with a special chart 1 hit, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance in conjunction with the right hit promotion, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right hit promotion being frequently emphasized. This allows the instruction to the player to hit right to be executed appropriately.

(4-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by the presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, a display of an image encouraging a player to shoot a right-hit) that encourages a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, out of a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area);
A guidance means (for example, a process of executing a right hit suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120) that performs guidance light emission to encourage a player by moving the light emitting point of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L) to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path;
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed in a manner more emphasized than the second guidance display, urging the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path (for example, a large right hit promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and figures than a small right hit promotion effect),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display before the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state), which is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state (for example, a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect before the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)), and performs the first guidance display after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a large right hit promotion effect after the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 15-25 to FIG. 15-33).
The guidance means performs the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance display after turning off the light-emitting means (for example, as shown in Figs. 15-25 to 15-33, a part that turns off the frame lamp once and then lights it in an arch shape from the left side to the right side in conjunction with an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion performance),
The sound output means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light is output in conjunction with the guidance light being emitted (for example, as shown in Fig. 15-25 (c4) to Fig. 15-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first big right hit promotion performance, a sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance).
Thereafter, in a special state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state ends, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 15-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot on special chart 2, a part in which no sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, after a jackpot occurs, a small right-hit promotion effect is first executed to encourage the player to hit the right side modestly, and then a name image showing the name of the jackpot game state is displayed to make the player aware that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the big right-hit promotion effect is used to notify the player that he or she will hit the right side in an emphasized manner, so that the player can be sure to recognize that he or she will hit the right side in subsequent games. In addition, while the big right-hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp is turned off once, and then the lit portion of the lamp moves to the right to promote right hitting, so that the player can be encouraged to hit the right side more clearly and effectively. Furthermore, when the frame lamp is used to promote right hitting, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hitting promotion, so that the player can be encouraged to hit the right side by the sound as well. In addition, in the event of a consecutive win on special chart 2 in a probability variation state or time-saving state after a big win game state, the right-hit promotion has already been performed, so the big right-hit promotion effect is not executed as in the case of the first win on special chart 1, and no sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect linked to it is output, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right-hit promotion being frequently emphasized. This allows the instruction to the player to hit right to be executed appropriately.

(4-2) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by the presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, a display of an image encouraging a player to shoot a right-hit) that encourages a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, out of a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area);
A guidance means (for example, a process of executing a right hit suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120) that performs guidance light emission to encourage a player by moving the light emitting point of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L) to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path;
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed in a manner more emphasized than the second guidance display, urging the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path (for example, a large right hit promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and figures than a small right hit promotion effect),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display before the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state), which is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state (for example, a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect before the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)), and performs the first guidance display after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a large right hit promotion effect after the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 15-25 to FIG. 15-33).
The guiding means is
After turning off the light-emitting means, the guidance light is emitted in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in Figs. 15-25 to 15-33, after turning off the light once, the frame lamp is lit in an arch shape from the left side to the right side in conjunction with an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance),
Thereafter, in a special state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state ends, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance light is not emitted (for example, as shown in Figure 15-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot on special chart 2, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, after a jackpot occurs, a small right-hit promotion effect is first executed to encourage the player to hit the right side modestly, and then a name image showing the name of the jackpot game state is displayed to make the player aware that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the big right-hit promotion effect is used to notify the player that he or she will hit the right side in an emphasized manner, so that the player can be sure to recognize that he or she will hit the right side in subsequent games. In addition, while the big right-hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp is turned off once, and then the lit portion of the lamp moves to the right to promote right hitting, so that the player can be encouraged to hit the right side more clearly and effectively. Furthermore, when the frame lamp is used to promote right hitting, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hitting promotion, so that the player can be encouraged to hit the right side by the sound as well. In addition, in the event of a consecutive win on special chart 2 in a probability variation state or time-saving state after a big win game state, the right-hit promotion has already been performed, so the big right-hit promotion effect is not executed as in the case of the first win on special chart 1, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect linked to it, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right-hit promotion being frequently emphasized. This allows the instruction to the player to hit right to be executed appropriately.

(5) The second guidance display is displayed in a more emphasized manner than the name display of the advantageous state, which is part of the start performance.

Specifically, the image display in the big right-hit promotion effect shown in Figures 15-25 to 15-33 is larger than the name image display in the fanfare effect shown in Figure 15-24 (c2), and the text images appear one by one in stages, and the execution time is longer and more emphasized. This makes it possible to emphasize to the player that he or she should hit right.

(6) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means includes:
outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emitted in conjunction with the first guidance light emitted among the plurality of guidance light emissions;
Among the multiple times of the guidance light emission, in conjunction with the intermediate guidance light emission, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is not output,
When the final guidance light emission is performed among the multiple guidance light emission, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the right-hit promotion effects by the frame lamps that are performed multiple times, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect in conjunction with the first right-hit promotion, but the speakers 8L and 8R do not output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect for the second or subsequent right-hit promotions. For example, if the right-hit promotion effect by the frame lamps is performed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound in conjunction with the first right-hit promotion based on the sound data for the right-hit promotion effect, but do not output a sound in conjunction with the second or subsequent right-hit promotions. In other words, the sound data for the right-hit promotion effect includes only sound data that is linked to the first right-hit promotion. This prevents the sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion from overlapping with the BGM during the jackpot round that is output after the big right-hit promotion effect is performed, and allows the player to smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round.

(7) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means includes:
outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emitted in conjunction with the first guidance light emitted among the plurality of guidance light emissions;
outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emitted in conjunction with the intermediate guidance light emitted among the multiple guidance light emissions;
When the final guidance light emission is performed among the multiple guidance light emission, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the right-hit promotion effects by the frame lamps over multiple times, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect in conjunction with the first right-hit promotion, and the speakers 8L and 8R also output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect in conjunction with the subsequent right-hit promotions, but the speakers 8L and 8R do not output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect for the last right-hit promotion. For example, when the right-hit promotion effect by the frame lamps is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound in conjunction with each of the first and second right-hit promotions based on the sound data for the right-hit promotion effect, and do not output a sound in conjunction with the third right-hit promotion. In other words, the sound data for the right-hit promotion effect only includes sound data in conjunction with each of the first and second right-hit promotions. Note that the sound data only includes sound data in conjunction with one right-hit promotion, and the performance control CPU 120 may execute two loops of sound data in conjunction with one right-hit promotion. Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data linked to two right hit promotions, and the performance control CPU 120 may execute the sound data linked to two right hit promotions once. This allows the player to smoothly hear the background music during the jackpot round without the sound corresponding to the right hit promotion overlapping with the background music during the jackpot round that is output after the big right hit promotion performance is executed.

(8) The light emitting means is composed of a plurality of lamps, and emits the guidance light in conjunction with the first guidance display after all of the plurality of lamps are turned off (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-25(c3), a portion that turns off all of the frame lamps once and then lights up the frame lamps in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, all of the frame lamps are turned off once, and then the frame lamps are lit in a manner that corresponds to the big right hit promotion performance, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right in a clearer and more effective manner.

(9) The light emitting means emits the guidance light in association with the first guidance display based on data defined by a lighting data table,
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in Figure 15-34) that specifies the execution time of the guidance light emission, a child table (for example, the child table shown in Figure 15-35) that indicates a grandchild table in which data to be referenced by the light emission means is specified, and the grandchild table (for example, the child table shown in Figures 15-36 and 15-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamps 9, including the frame lamps, refer to the parent table to determine the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect, refer to the child table to determine the grandchild table in which the lighting data is specified, and refer to the grandchild table to turn on/blink/turn off. This allows the game effect lamps 9 to be lit efficiently in an appropriate lighting mode.

(10) The grandchild table corresponding to the light-emitting means that does not emit the guidance light is not specified in the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-35, the bottom left lamp 075F009D, the top attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left board lamp 075F009E are not used in the big right hit promotion performance and are turned off, so no grandchild table is provided. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 as much as possible.

(11) The guidance means performs the guidance light emission by sequentially moving the light emitting portion of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player shoots the game medium (for example, a portion that sequentially lights up each lamp included in the frame lamp from the left side to the right side of the game area as shown in Figures 15-25 to 15-33).

Specifically, as shown in Figures 15-25 to 15-33, by lighting up each lamp included in the frame lamp in sequence from the left side of the play area to the right side, a big right hit promotion effect is executed, which clearly encourages the player to hit to the right.

(12) The guidance means emits the guidance light while changing the light color of the light emitting means (for example, a part that lights up a frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, the frame lamp lights up in seven colors while performing a big right-hit promotion effect, more effectively encouraging players to hit to the right.

(13) The second guidance display is not affected by fade-in and fade-out switching of background images, which is performed in association with the control of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figures 15-38 (d1) to 15-39 (d4), a portion that continues to display an image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect without being affected by fade-in and fade-out switching of background images).

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 15-38 (d1) to Fig. 15-39 (d4), the small right-hit promotion effect continues without being affected by the background image switching display caused by the fade-in and fade-out when switching from the fanfare effect to the jackpot round. This makes it possible to encourage the player to continue hitting to the right even if the background image switching display causes the fanfare effect to switch to the jackpot round.

(14) The second guidance display, as a display of a performance image in the special state, is not affected by a display in a preview performance that suggests that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-49 (g5), a portion that continues to display an image corresponding to a small right hit promotion performance without being affected by the image display in the group preview performance).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-49 (g5), in the probability variable state after the favorable state for a jackpot ends, the small right hit promotion effect continues without being affected by the display in the advance notice effect that suggests that a jackpot will occur. As a result, even if the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see due to the advance notice effect being executed, the arrow image and text image in the small right hit promotion effect continue to be displayed without being hindered in visibility, so it is possible to encourage the player to continue hitting to the right.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guide light is not emitted either (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive wins on special chart 2, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive wins on special chart 2, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect, as occurs during the first win, and the frame lamps do not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect. This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling annoyed by frequent emphasis on right hit promotion.

[Modification of characteristic portion 075F]
A modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned characteristic part 075F will be described.

(About turning off the lights before the big right hit promotion performance is performed)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-25 (c3), all the lamps of the frame lamps are turned off once, and then the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance. However, it is not limited to turning off all the lamps, and some of the lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp that is turned on first in the big right hit promotion performance (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) may be turned on. In this way, the connection when the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance afterwards can be clearly seen.

(About the display change during the big win round)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 15-38 (d1) to Fig. 15-39 (d4), when switching from the fanfare effect to the jackpot round, the background image is switched by fading in and out, but this is not limited to this. For example, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a whiteout effect in which a pure white screen is inserted between the fanfare effect and the jackpot round, or a blackout effect in which a pure black screen is inserted, may be used.

In addition, the display change during the jackpot round may be to display a BGM selection screen for selecting BGM (music), and switch to a background image corresponding to the BGM selected on the BGM selection screen.

In addition, the switching display during the jackpot round may be such that a mode selection screen is displayed to allow the player to select a presentation mode, and the background image is switched to one corresponding to the mode selected on the mode selection screen.

In either case, even if a special switching display is performed during a big win round, it is important that the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is not affected.

(Display of the performance image during the probability change state after the big hit game ball state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-49 (g5), the image display by the group notice effect is exemplified as the display of the effect image in the probability change state after the big hit game ball state, but it is not limited to this. For example, as the display of the effect image in the probability change state after the big hit game ball state, a whiteout effect in which a pure white screen is inserted during the reach effect, a blackout effect in which a pure black screen is inserted, a pseudo consecutive notice effect in which the decorative pattern changes and the temporary stop are repeated multiple times, or a light guide plate provided on the front side of the play area is turned on or blinked to make the visibility of the decorative pattern difficult may be used. In either case, even if a special effect display is performed in the probability change state after the big hit game ball state, it is sufficient that the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is not affected.

(About the "Aim for the V" production)
In this embodiment, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning hole provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is exemplified as the specific area, and an image pointing to the V large winning hole is displayed as the "Aim for V" performance as shown in Fig. 15-43 (e13). However, this is not limited to this, and the image display in the "Aim for V" performance, which is the third guidance display using an image display related to the specific area, is not limited to one pointing to the V large winning hole itself, but may also point to the vicinity of the V large winning hole, or may point to the path leading to the V large winning hole, for example, a lid portion that opens and closes the V large winning hole located upstream of the V large winning hole.

(Regarding the promotion of big right hits)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 15-25 (c4) to Fig. 15-31 (c23), an arrow graphic image appears first, and then the text image "Hit right!!" appears, but this is not limited to this. For example, the text image "Hit right!!" may appear first, and then the arrow graphic image may appear. In addition, the image display of the large right hit promotion effect, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a text image, whereas the image display of the small right hit promotion effect, which is an example of the second guidance display, may be composed of only an arrow image or only a text image.

(About advantageous situations)
In this embodiment, the period of the "advantageous state" is exemplified as the period shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1) to FIG. 15-47 (f4) (the period from t3 in FIG. 15-20 to t16 in FIG. 15-21), but is not limited thereto. For example, the period of the "advantageous state" may be the period excluding the fanfare effect period, that is, the period shown in FIG. 15-39 (d3) to FIG. 15-47 (f4) (the period from t4 in FIG. 15-20 to t16 in FIG. 15-21). In addition, the fanfare effect and the big right hit promotion effect may be executed during the period in which the pattern that will cause a jackpot is determined (pattern determination period).

(About the right-hand hit promotion effect in the case of the first hit)
In this embodiment, in the case of a jackpot on a special chart 1, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, but this is not limited to this. For example, the manner of the big right hit promotion performance of the speakers 8L and 8R and the frame lamp may be made different depending on the type of jackpot on a special chart 1. For example, when a jackpot on a special chart 1 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, while the speakers 8L and 8R do not output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and when a jackpot on a special chart 1 is a guaranteed jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R may output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance. In addition, if the jackpot on special chart 1 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp may not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L, 8R may not output sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance.

(About the right-hit promotion effect in the case of consecutive wins on special chart 2)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive wins on special chart 2, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, but this is not limited to this. For example, the frame lamp may light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, while the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sounds in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance.

Also, depending on the type of consecutive wins on the special chart 2, the manner of the big right hit promotion performance of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be made different. For example, if the jackpot on the special chart 1 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp may be lit in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, while the speakers 8L, 8R may not output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and if the consecutive win on the special chart 2 is a sure-win jackpot, the frame lamp may be lit in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L, 8R may output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance. Also, if the consecutive win on the special chart 2 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp may not be lit in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L, 8R may not output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance. If the consecutive hits on special chart 2 are a guaranteed jackpot, unlike the first hit on special chart 1, the frame lamp may light up in a special manner (for example, gold or seven colors) according to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R may output a sound in a special manner according to the big right hit promotion performance. Also, on the screen of the image display device 5, the big right hit promotion performance may be executed in a special manner (for example, a special character appears) different from the first hit on special chart 1.

(Regarding the third guide sign)
In this embodiment, as the third guidance display using the image display related to the specific area, an image pointing to the V-large winning hole during the jackpot round in the probability jackpot has been exemplified, but this is not limited thereto. For example, as the third guidance display, in the probability jackpot state after the jackpot game state ends, an image urging the player to aim at the second start winning hole and launch the game ball, or an image urging the player to aim at the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) and launch the game ball may be displayed. For example, after the ending performance ends, the performance control CPU 120 may display a text image of "Aim!" on the image display device 5 together with an arrow image pointing to the second start winning hole or the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) based on receiving a reserved memory number designation command (C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), a pattern change designation command (8D system command), a display result designation command (8C system command), and a change pattern designation command (81 system command) from the CPU 103. Even if such an image display is performed, the graphic and text images in the small right hit promotion performance may be continuously displayed.

(Regarding control of time-saving state by displaying losing symbols)
In each of the above-mentioned features and variations, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through a big win state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A.

The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbols or part of the small winning symbols.

In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving symbols, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing symbol, a lottery random number for a big win symbol, a lottery random number for a small win symbol, a random number for determining a big win lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

These time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to switch to the time-saving state. However, if a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery will be held to determine whether or not to switch to the time-saving state, and no lottery will be held to determine the number of times the time-saving state will be used.

In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbols and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols does not change according to the setting value; in other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern can be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

In addition, when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is held, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. In addition, a lottery using a structure may be held, for example, a time-saving area may be set inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area is considered to be the winning of the time-saving pattern.

When the time-saving symbol is selected using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed) will not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

In addition, when drawing the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when using these random numbers as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since performance other than the probability of winning varies depending on the settings.

The timing of the lottery results for the time-saving symbol may be determined after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but is only performed in the low probability, low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already in, the number of time-saving times may be reset or the lottery may not be performed, as long as it is determined for each gaming machine.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed can be set to a number of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving patterns differs depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving patterns can be changed between Special Pattern 1 and Special Pattern 2.

In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving times awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times the time-saving function is played may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving function until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of times the time-saving function is played may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

The number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving state may be different between the time-saving state controlled by the time-saving symbol and the time-saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a specified number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times for the time-saving limiter is updated. Also, the pattern confirmation time for the time-saving pattern may be different from the pattern confirmation time for other patterns.

In the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 075F, the game state must always go through the jackpot game state in order to be controlled to the time-saving state, so the big right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect for encouraging the player to hit the right in the time-saving state can be performed during the fanfare effect that is performed when a jackpot occurs. However, if the above-mentioned losing symbol is used as the time-saving symbol, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state without going through the jackpot game state, so when the time-saving state is controlled in response to the display of the losing symbol, time must be secured to execute the big right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect between the display of the losing symbol and the control to the time-saving state. Therefore, the big right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect can be executed using the method shown below.

For example, if the pattern determination time until the fluctuation of a losing pattern that is not a time-saving pattern stops is set to 0.5 seconds, the pattern determination time until the losing pattern that is a time-saving pattern stops may be set to 30 seconds, which is longer than the time-saving pattern, and a time-saving fanfare effect may be executed during that time to notify the start of control of the time-saving state. In addition to a display result designation command indicating a normal losing fluctuation that does not grant time saving as a command for specifying a loss, the CPU 103 may prepare a display result designation command indicating a losing fluctuation for time saving that grants time saving in addition to a display result designation command indicating a normal losing fluctuation that does not grant time saving, and transmit a performance control command to the performance control CPU 120 using both commands depending on whether or not the time-saving pattern is a losing fluctuation. Then, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a display result designation command indicating a normal losing fluctuation, the pattern determination time may be set to 0.5 seconds, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives a display result designation command indicating a losing fluctuation for time saving, the pattern determination time may be set to 30 seconds.

The performance control CPU 120 displays a name image (for example, "Time-saving RUSH") indicating the name of the time-saving state on the image display device 5 during the 30-second pattern determination time, outputs a sound from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the control of the time-saving state, and lights up the game effect lamp 9 in a manner corresponding to the control of the time-saving state. A portion of such a time-saving fanfare performance can be made to correspond to a portion of the fanfare performance as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c2).

15-24(c1), an image (for example, a text image of "Congratulations!") celebrating the time-saving state may be displayed on the image display device 5 before the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") due to this time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, a sound celebrating the time-saving state may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed to a lighting mode celebrating the time-saving state. Also, as a small right-hit promotion effect, a small right-hit promotion effect may be executed in which an image consisting of a figure (an arrow pointing to the right) and text (the text "Right hit") is displayed small on the upper right corner of the image display device 5, a sound encouraging a right hit may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the right-hit display unit 075F030 and the right-hit display unit 075F055 may be changed to a mode encouraging a right hit (lit). In addition, the image in the small right hit promotion effect displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 and the lighting by the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055 start and end at the same timing. In other words, both are designed to encourage the player to make a right hit for the same period of time.

After that, similar to the example shown in FIG. 15-24(c2), the small right hit promotion effect may continue to be executed while the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") due to the time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, and then, similar to the example shown in FIG. 15-25(c3), the game effect lamp 9 may be temporarily turned off, and then, similar to the examples shown in FIG. 15-25(c4) to FIG. 15-38(c26), the large right hit promotion effect may be executed during the time-saving fanfare effect. During this time, the small right hit promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after the large right hit promotion effect is executed, the game state may be controlled to the time-saving state, and the small right hit promotion effect may be continued, similar to the examples shown in FIG. 15-48 to FIG. 15-50.

In this way, even if the time-saving state is controlled due to a losing pattern, by ensuring a pattern determination time that is longer than the pattern determination time for a losing pattern that is not a time-saving pattern, it is possible to execute a large right hit promotion effect or a small right hit promotion effect during that pattern determination time.

In the case where the time-saving state is controlled by the losing symbol as a trigger, it is not limited to using the symbol determination time to execute the big right hit promotion effect or the small right hit promotion effect as described above. If there is a reserved memory corresponding to a miss for the next game (change) of the game in which the losing symbol that grants the time-saving is determined, the time-saving fanfare effect may be executed and the big right hit promotion effect or the small right hit promotion effect may be executed in the next game (change). Specifically, if the next game (change) of the game in which the losing symbol is determined is a miss change, the time-saving fanfare effect may be executed and the big right hit promotion effect or the small right hit promotion effect may be executed instead without executing an effect that makes you expect a hit such as a reach effect or a notice effect. However, if the next game (change) of the game in which the losing symbol is determined is a big hit, the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1) is executed afterwards, so the time-saving fanfare effect is not executed.

On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory for the next game (change) after the game in which the losing symbol that grants the time-saving bonus has been confirmed, the time-saving fanfare effect may be executed while the symbol is not changing, and the large right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect may be executed. However, in this case, in order to prevent the customer waiting demonstration effect from being executed and the time-saving fanfare effect being hindered, the CPU 103 is not sent a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. Alternatively, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) from the CPU 103, the time-saving fanfare effect may be executed without executing the customer waiting demonstration effect.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each feature may be combined with some or all of the features of other features as appropriate. The combined features or individual features that are not combined may be combined with some or all of the features of other features as appropriate.

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative symbol display area 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General winning port 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 13 Voice control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 21 Gate switch 22A First start port switch 22B Second start port switch 23 Count switch 25A First hold indicator 25B Second hold indicator 25C General hold indicator 30 Ball hitting operation handle 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 35A Controller sensor unit 35B Push sensor 41 Passing gate 81, 82 Solenoid 100 Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ROM
102,122 RAM
104, 124 Random number circuit 106 RTC
110 Switch circuit 111 Output circuit 123 Display control unit 75SG001 Pachinko game machine 300 First performance unit 301 Base member 302 Cover member 303 LED board 331 Decorative pattern 400 Second performance unit 401 Base member 402 Cover member 403 LED board 420 Decorative part 600 Third performance unit 800 Fourth performance unit 801 Base member 802 Cover member 803 LED board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
An electronic component that is provided so as to be visible to a player;
A specific member provided around the electronic component;
a light-transmitting member that is a light-transmitting member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic components and the specific member through the light-transmitting member;
a launching means capable of launching game media in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means for displaying a guidance message to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second area out of the first area and the second area;
a guide light emitting means for illuminating a guide light to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second area by moving a light emitting portion of the light emitting means;
Equipped with
the light-transmitting member is provided in front of the electronic component and the specific member,
the guidance display includes a first guidance display to be displayed in a first display area and a second guidance display to be displayed in a second display area smaller than the first display area ,
The guidance display means is
displaying the second guidance display in a first period during a predetermined period in which a start performance related to the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed, displaying the first guidance display and the second guidance display in a second period during the predetermined period that is after the first period, and in the subsequent period, ending the first guidance display while displaying the second guidance display;
In a special state after the control of the advantageous state is ended, the second guidance display is performed;
the second guidance display displayed during the first period and the second guidance display displayed in the special state have a common display mode,
the guidance light-emitting means emits light in a manner different from the guidance light-emitting manner during the first period and in a manner linked to the start performance , the light-emitting means is turned off before the second period starts, and when the second period starts, the guidance light-emitting means emits light in a manner linked to the first guidance display.
A gaming machine characterized by: